Official Software
Get notified when we add a new Alfa RomeoSpider Manual

We cover 60 Alfa Romeo vehicles, were you looking for one of these?

Alfa - Auto - alfa-romeo-giulietta-2015-instruktionsbog-106382
Alfa - Auto - alfa-romeo-giulietta-2016-kezelesi-utmutato-106395
Alfa - Auto - alfa-romeo-giulietta-2016-106397
Alfa - Auto - alfa-romeo-giulietta-2014-navod-k-obsluze-106368
Alfa Romeo - 156 - Workshop Manual - (2007)
Alfa - Auto - alfa-romeo-giulietta-2015-uzivatelska-prirucka-106385
Alfa Romeo - 156 - Workshop Manual - (2005)
Alfa Romeo - MiTo - Owners Manual - (2017) - (Polish)
Alfa - Auto - alfa-romeo-giulietta-2014-instruktionsbog-106371
Alfa Romeo Alfa Romeo Giulietta Alfa Romeo Giulietta 2011 Owners Manual
Alfa - Auto - alfa-romeo-giulietta-2017-brukerhandbok-106411
Alfa Romeo - 164 - Owners Manual - (1991)
Alfa Romeo - Brera - Workshop Manual - (1986)
Alfa Romeo - MiTo - Owners Manual - (2017) - (Polish)
Alfa - Auto - alfa-romeo-giulietta-2016-navod-k-obsluze-106393
Alfa Romeo Alfa Romeo Giulietta Alfa Romeo Giulietta 2015 Misc Documents Brochure
Alfa Romeo Alfa Romeo Giulietta Alfa Romeo Giulietta Misc Documents Parts Catalogue
Alfa Romeo - Giulietta - Sales Brochure - 2010 - 2010
Alfa - Auto - alfa-romeo-giulietta-2016-handleiding-106398
Alfa Romeo - MiTo - Owners Manual - (2015) - (French)
Alfa Romeo Alfa Romeo Giulietta Alfa Romeo Giulietta 2010 Misc Documents Roadside Service
Alfa Romeo Alfa Romeo Giulietta Alfa Romeo Giulietta 2014 Misc Documents Brochure
Alfa - Auto - alfa-romeo-giulietta-2016-instruktionsbog-106400
Alfa Romeo Alfa Romeo Alfetta Alfa Romeo Alfetta Misc Documents Parts Catalogue
Alfa Romeo - 147 - Workshop Manual - 2000 - 2010
Alfa - Auto - alfa-romeo-giulia-2014-kezelesi-utmutato-106344
Alfa - Auto - alfa-romeo-giulietta-2017-betriebsanleitung-106412
Alfa Romeo - Brera - Workshop Manual - (1987)
Alfa Romeo - MiTo - Workshop Manual - (2008)
Sprint-Import L3-061 1000cc 1.0L Turbo VIN 2 FI (1987)
Alfa Romeo - MiTo - Workshop Manual - (2016)
Alfa Romeo - Brera - Sales Brochure - 2010 - 2010
Alfa Romeo - Giulietta - Sales Brochure - 2011 - 2011 (2)
Alfa Romeo - 164 - Parts Catalogue - (2000)
Alfa Romeo - Brera - Miscellaneous Documents - 2005 - 2005
Alfa - Auto - alfa-romeo-giulia-2014-manual-del-propietario-106336
Alfa Romeo - Brera - Sales Brochure - 2002 - 2006
Alfa Romeo - 159 - Workshop Manual - (2006)
Alfa Romeo - Giulietta - Sales Brochure - 2011 - 2011
Alfa - Auto - alfa-romeo-giulietta-2015-manual-do-proprietario-106379
Alfa Romeo - Giulia - Sales Brochure - 2013 - 2013 (French)
Alfa Romeo Alfa Romeo Giulietta Alfa Romeo Giulietta 2015 Misc Documents Buyers Guide
Alfa Romeo - 4C - Workshop Manual - (1991)
Alfa Romeo - 147 - Workshop Manual - 2000 - 2010
Alfa Romeo - MiTo - Workshop Manual - (2008)
Cars & Automotive Accessories - Alfa-Romeo - Giulia
Alfa Romeo Alfa Romeo Alfasud Alfa Romeo Alfasud 1986 Workshop Manual
Alfa Romeo Alfa Romeo Junior Alfa Romeo Junior 2000 Workshop Manual
Alfa Romeo Alfa Romeo Giulietta Alfa Romeo Giulietta 2010 Misc Documents Blue and Me Radio Nav
Alfa - Auto - alfa-romeo-giulia-2014-106342
Alfa Romeo - 156 - Workshop Manual - (2005)
Toys & Accessories - Lego - Juniors - POLICE TRUCK CHASE - 10735
Gmc W Sprint Workshop Manual (Sprint-Caballero V8-305 5.0L (1982))
Alfa Romeo Alfa Romeo Giulietta Alfa Romeo Giulietta 2010 Misc Documents Blue and Me Quick User Guide
Alfa Romeo Alfa Romeo Crosswagon Alfa Romeo Crosswagon 2005 Misc Documents Owners Manual Supplement
Toys & Accessories - Lego - Juniors - LOST TEMPLE - 10725
Alfa Romeo - 147 - Workshop Manual - 2000 - 2010
Toys & Accessories - Mega - tmnt-junior - Leo Turtle Buggy, DMW43
Sprint L3-61 1.0L (1988)
Alfa - Auto - alfa-romeo-giulia-2016-navod-k-obsluze-106313
Summary of Content
2016 OWNER’S MANUAL SPIDER VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS 䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .7 䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .8 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 1 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers: Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinc- • The Warranty with terms and conditions for maintaintive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are ing its validity traditional to our vehicles. • The range of additional services available to FCA US This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assisLLC customers tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencIt is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- When it comes to service, remember that your authorized tions and recommendations in this manual will help dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction. INTRODUCTION 5 The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains a complete listing of all subjects. contains the information you desire. Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and this Owner’s Manual: HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment. 1 6 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through Vehicle Identification Number the windshield. This number also appears engraved on an Aluminum plate glued and riveted on the floor NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. crossmember under the passenger seat. 1 8 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS 䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Locking Doors With A Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 . . . . . . . . .18 . . . . . . . . .19 . . . . . . . . .19 . . . . . . . . .20 . . . . . . . . .22 . . . . . . . . .22 ▫ Central Door Locking/Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . .22 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Locking/Unlocking Doors From The Inside . . .24 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 ▫ Emergency Door Locking Device . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 ▫ Door Opening/Closing Mechanism Reset . . . . .25 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .67 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 䡵 DECKLID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 ▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .43 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical key simply push the mechanical key release button. 2 Key Fob 1 — Vehicle Key 2 — Push To Open/Close Vehicle Key 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ignition Key Removal 2. Rotate the key to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and engage the handbrake and release brake pedal. 1. Push the brake pedal and place the transmission into first (1) or reverse (R) gear by selecting/pushing the 3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder. buttons on the console. Ignition Switch Positions Transmission Gear Selector 1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK) 2 — MAR (ON/RUN) 3 — AVV (START) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the vehicle into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. (Continued) CAUTION! An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turn the key to the right. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for maintenance information. 2 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle. and the ignition switch position is in the STOP (OFF/ LOCK) position, sounds a signal to remove the key. If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a SENTRY KEY problem with the electronics. The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorCAUTION! ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked • Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unator unlocked. tended. The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded • The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatelectronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized ible with some aftermarket remote starting sysvehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are protems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate starting problems and loss of security protection. the vehicle. All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. Key-In-Ignition Reminder THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired opNOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the eration. vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the be programmed to any other vehicle. user’s authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF authorized dealer. EQUIPPED General Information The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio decklid for unauthorized entry and the ignition for unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm, Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and starting. It will also emit an acoustic signal and flash the with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). park lights, and taillights. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Replacement Keys 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Operation NOTE: • The engine locking function is guaranteed by the Alfa Romeo CODE, which is automatically activated when 1. Wrongful opening of one of the doors or the decklid the key is extracted from the ignition switch. (perimeter protection); • The alarm is adapted to meet requirements in various 2. Wrongful operation of the ignition switch (key turned countries. to MAR ON/RUN); To Arm The System 3. Cutting of the battery leads; With the doors and decklid closed and the ignition key 4. Anomalous lifting/tilting of the car. either turned to STOP (OFF/LOCK) or removed, point Operation of the alarm is indicated by an acoustic and the key towards the vehicle then push and release the visual signal (flashing of the direction indicators for lock button. several seconds). The alarm activation modes may vary The system emits a visual signal and activates door according to the market. There is a maximum number of locking. acoustic/visual cycles. When this is reached the system A self-diagnosis stage lasting approximately 30 seconds returns to normal operation. precedes the activation of the alarm. During the selfdiagnosis, the vehicle security light flashes in the instrument panel at a frequency of about one flash per second. The alarm activates in the following cases: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 After the self-diagnosis stage, the vehicle security light The following operations are performed: flashes at a lower frequency (approximately one flash • Two brief flashes of the direction indicators. every three seconds). • Unlocking of the doors. If, after the alarm is switched on, a second visual signal emit via the vehicle security light in the instrument panel, NOTE: wait about four seconds and switch off the alarm by • If the central door locking system is released using the pushing the lock button, check that the doors and decklid metal insert of the key, the alarm is not disabled. are closed correctly and then reactivate the system by pushing the unlock button. • In the event of accidental activation of the alarm, or in any case to interrupt the visual signal cycle when If the alarm emits a visual signal even when the doors activated, it is possible to push the unlock button or and decklid are closed correctly, a system malfunction turn the ignition key to MAR (ON/RUN) for at least has occurred: in this case, contact a authorized vehicle five seconds, after which the system will deactivate. Dealership. To Disarm The System Deactivation Push the unlock button. Disarming To completely disable the alarm (e.g. during a lengthy period of vehicle inactivity), lock the vehicle by turning the metal insert of the key in the door lock. 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If the batteries of the key fob run out or there is a fault in the system, the alarm can be switched off by inserting the key in the ignition switch and turning it to MAR (ON/RUN). ILLUMINATED ENTRY NOTE: The interior light is located in the headliner in between the sun visors. The interior light can be set to three different positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right Position). REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF The interior lights will turn on whenever a door is EQUIPPED opened and the dimmer switch is not in the defeat This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a position. hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The The interior lights will turn on, remain on for approxiRKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the mately 30 seconds, and then fade to off if a door is vehicle to activate the system. opened using the outside door handle and then closed or a door is unlocked using the vehicles key. The interior lights will turn on and remain on for about four seconds and then fade to off if a door is opened using the inside door handle. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Unlock The Doors Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors. The park lights and turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the signal and the illuminated entry system will turn on. NOTE: The Door Unlock Indicator will illuminate in the instrument panel when one or both doors are unlocked. To Lock The Doors Key Fob Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter: locking of doors, switching off of internal roof light and single flashing of direction indicators. If one or more door are open, the doors will not be locked. This is indicated by a rapid flashing of the direction indicators. The doors will be locked if the NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked decklid is open however. with metal objects. When a speed of more than 12 mph (20 km/h) is reached, the doors will be locked automatically if the Autoclose 1 — Vehicle Key 2 — Push To Open/Close Vehicle Key 2 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE function was selected. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor- Transmitter Battery Replacement mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your InstruNOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ment Panel” for further information. apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ When the doors are locked from outside the vehicle perchlorate (using the remote control), the door lock indicator will The recommended replacement battery is CR2032. illuminate for a few seconds and then start flashing (deterrent function). Door LED Lock Indicator Battery Replacement Procedure THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Replace the Key Fob battery with the following proce- 3. Remove battery compartment #4; dure: 4. Replace battery #5, respecting the polarity; 1. Push button #1 and move the metal insert #2 to 5. Reinsert compartment #4 in the key and secure it by opening position; turning screw #3 to lock. 2. Turn screw #3 to unlock using a fine bit screwdriver; Key Fob Screw Location Key Fob Screw Location 2 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE General Information DOOR LOCKS The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Central Door Locking/Unlocking Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: Locking Doors From The Outside This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and With the doors closed, push the lock button on the key with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). fob or turn the metal insert (located inside the key fob) in Operation is subject to the following two conditions: the door lock. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and The Door Lock LED Indicator button will illuminate 2. This device must accept any interference received, to indicate that the doors have locked. including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 WARNING! Door Lock LED Indicator NOTE: Door locking is carried out with all doors shut. Unlocking Doors From The Outside Push the unlock button on the key or turn the metal insert (located inside the key) in the driver side door lock. • For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. 2 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locking/Unlocking Doors From The Inside Emergency Door Locking Device Push the Lock LED Indicator button . The button has an LED that indicates whether the doors are locked or unlocked. Passenger Side Door The passenger side door has a device to lock it when there is no current. Pushing the Lock LED Indicator button again cenTo lock it, place the metal insert of the ignition key in trally unlocks all doors and switches off the LED. housing #1 and turn it clockwise. Pushing the Lock LED Indicator button again centrally locks all the doors. The doors will be locked only if all the doors are properly shut. Once the doors have been locked using the remote control or the key, it will no longer be possible to unlock . them by pushing the Lock LED Indicator button NOTE: In the absence of electrical power supply (blown fuse, battery disconnected, etc.), it is still possible to lock the doors manually. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 • Introduce the metal insert of the ignition key in the front door pawl; or • Pull the internal door handle. Door Opening/Closing Mechanism Reset If the battery is disconnected or the protection fuse blows, the door opening/closing mechanism must be reset as follows: 1. Close all the doors. Emergency Door Lock Function 2. Push the unlock button on the key or the door on the locking/unlocking LED indicator button dashboard. To restore the starting condition of the door locks (only if 3. Push the lock button on the key or the door locking/ battery charge restored), proceed as follows: on the dashunlocking LED indicator button • Push the Unlock button on the remote control; board. • Push the door locking/unlocking LED indicator buton the dashboard; or ton 2 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WINDOWS Power Windows NOTE: • These operate when the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON and for about three minutes after the ignition key is turned to STOP or removed unless one of the doors is opened. • The buttons are located on the center console. Power Window Switch 1 — Driver Power Window Switch 2 — Passenger Power Window Switch Push/Pull the corresponding buttons to open/close the desired window. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 When one of the two buttons is pushed briefly, the the electric window control units replaced), the autowindow moves in stages; if the button is held down to matic operation of the windows must be restored. open, ⬙continuous automatic⬙ operation is activated. The restoration procedure must be performed as deIf the button is pushed again, the window will stop in its scribed below with the doors closed: current position. If the button is pushed for several 1. Completely open the driver’s door window keeping seconds, the window lowers automatically (only with the operating button pushed for at least three seconds ignition key in MAR-ON position). after the (lower) end of travel position is reached. Continuous Automatic Operation 2. Completely raise the driver side window and hold the This is activated by pushing one of the two buttons for button down for at least three seconds once the longer than half a second. The window will stop when it (upper) end of travel position has been reached. is fully opened, or when the button is pushed again. 3. Proceed in the same way as described in points 1 and It can be used on both the driver side and passenger side, 2 for the passenger side door. only for lowering the window. 4. Make sure that the reset is correct by checking that the Electric Window System Reset windows work automatically. After a break in power supply for the control units (battery replaced or disconnected or protective fuses for 2 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Improper actuation of the power windows may be dangerous. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Before and during window operation make sure no one and no object (including clothing) is in the path of the moving glass or its mechanism. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. DECKLID NOTE: During normal vehicle operation, the luggage compartment can reach temperatures above 149º F (65° C). Pay attention when transporting objects that may be damaged at such temperatures. Do not keep aerosol cans in the vehicle: danger of explosion. Aerosol cans must not be exposed to temperatures above 122º F (50° C). Opening Procedure With driver side door open, pull lever #1 located at the point illustrated in the figure. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Insert the end of the rod in housing, making sure that the rod engages in the smallest hole of the retaining clip. Care must be taken to keep the decklid raised until the rod is fixed in the correct position. NOTE: Maintain a tight grip on the decklid when raising, in order to prevent any external occurrence (e.g. a gust of wind) from suddenly opening the decklid to end of travel. Additionally, in order to prevent any damage to the vehicle or broken windows, do not force the decklid beyond the opening position necessary to secure the supporting rod in the hole of the retaining clip. Decklid Release Lever Location 1 — Decklid Release Lever Closing Procedure 1. Hold the decklid up with one hand and use the other to remove rod from housing and reinsert it in its locking device. Raise the decklid and release supporting rod from its 2. Lower the decklid approximately 7.8 inches (20 cm) locking device. from the engine compartment and let it drop. Make 2 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE sure that the decklid is completely closed and not only fastened in safety position by trying to open it. If it is not completely closed, do not push the decklid down, but raise it and repeat the procedure. NOTE: Always check that the decklid is closed correctly to prevent it from opening while the vehicle is travelling. WARNING! • The maximum permitted load in the luggage compartment, in addition to the kits provided, is 33.1 lbs. (15 kg). Do not exceed the maximum permitted load in the luggage compartment. • When accessing the rear luggage compartment, do not come into contact with engine, or other components, that may be hot and could burn you if touched. • Access the luggage compartment only with the vehicle stationary. Before exiting a vehicle, always (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) shift the vehicle into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF, and remove the key fob from the ignition. • The decklid may drop suddenly, causing serious injury, if the supporting rod is not positioned correctly. • The decklid must always be closed properly, and the lock engaged, while the vehicle is in motion. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems: • Seat Belt Systems • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags • Child Restraints THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Important Safety Precautions restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: 5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride properly. buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”) 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate. 3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the 2 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space Seat Belt Systems between occupants and the door and occupants could Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even be injured. on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be and could cause a collision that includes you. This can modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact happen far away from home or on your own street. the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙ can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped) BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when- BeltAlert Warning Sequence ever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START or The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the MAR/RUN position. vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unInitial Indication buckled (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first not active when the outboard front passenger seat is turned to the AVV/START or MAR/RUN position, a unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain ignition switch is first turned to the AVV/START or on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning MAR/ RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occuBeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger pants to buckle their seat belts. seat is unoccupied. Change Of Status If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) 2 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulBeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho- der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti- normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vating BeltAlert. vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. (Continued) (Continued) 2 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you. • A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. (Continued) (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING! (Continued) • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. 2 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortslack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the Seat Belts And Pregnant Women webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. Pregnant Women And Seat Belts The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including the latch plate. pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. if they are wearing a seat belt. 2 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm. Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) The seat belt in the passenger seating position is NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. worn snugly and positioned properly. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Restraints” section of this manual. The table below If the passenger seating position is equipped with an defines the type of feature for each seating position. ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat. 2 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted. 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. WARNING! • The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING! (Continued) only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Air Bag System Components • Supplemental Side Air Bags • Supplemental Knee Air Bags • Front and Side Impact Sensors • Seat Belt Pretensioners • Seat Belt Buckle Switch • Seat Track Position Sensors Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag Advanced Front Air Bags system components: This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air • Air Bag Warning Light Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The • Steering Wheel and Column passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The • Instrument Panel words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on • Knee Impact Bolsters the air bag covers. • Advanced Front Air Bags 2 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Advanced Front Air Bag Locations 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 — Passenger Knee Bolsters 3 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Bolster • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components. The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags. WARNING! • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In (Continued) 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. Advanced Front Air Bag Operation Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced On the other hand, depending on the type and location of Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. severe initial deceleration. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the Advanced Front Air Bags. driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bags Air Bags. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental DoorIntegrated Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Knee Impact Bolsters WARNING! • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries to front outboard occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. The SABICs are located in the door trim below the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” 2 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bag Label The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events. The SABICs deploy upward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs SABICs are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the SABIC in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the SABIC on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require SABIC occupant protection. In side impacts, the SABICs deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left side SABIC only and a right-side impact deploys the right side SABIC only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not SABICs should have deployed. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 SABICs will not deploy in all side collisions, including their backs against the seats. Children must be properly some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is that do not impact the area of the passenger compart- appropriate for the size of the child. ment. SABICs may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy. WARNING! SABICs are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. SABICs deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to SABICs can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating SABIC. To get the best protection from the SABICs, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The door trim below the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located, should remain free from any obstructions. • SABICs need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. • Being too close to the SABICs during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. (Continued) 2 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Relying on the SABICs alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The SABICs work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, SABICs won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have SABICs. If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious to you, but significantly within a few days, or if you have any they will open during air bag deployment. blistering, see your doctor immediately. If A Deployment Occurs • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the immediately after deployment. process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye the air bag system. irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inauthorized dealer immediately. structions for cleaning. Enhanced Accident Response System Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- In the event of an impact, if the communication network ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending bags will not be in place to protect you. on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine WARNING! Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well. NOTE: whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions: • Cut off fuel to the engine. • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is pushed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pushing the hazard light button. • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System. • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, • Unlock the power door locks. but they will open during air bag deployment. 2 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure. Customer Action 1. Turn Ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must Be Placed In Neutral State). 2. Turn Ignition ON. 3. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 4. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. Customer Will See Left Turn Light Is OFF. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light Is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light Is ON SOLID. Right Turn Signal Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light Is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Customer Action 6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must Be Placed In Neutral State). 8. Turn Ignition OFF. 9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually). Customer Will See Left Turn Light Is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light Is ON SOLID. Left Turn light Is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF. System is now reset and the engine may be started. Air Bag Warning Light The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components. The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. reset procedure must be performed again in order to be The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the successful. instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to 2 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protecThe ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc- system immediately. tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. WARNING! While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags dealer service the air bag system immediately. to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes first turned to the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to air bag system immediately. eight-second interval. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may (Continued) not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. Event Data Recorder (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will 2 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; personally identifying data routinely acquired during a • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts crash investigation. were buckled/fastened; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How fast the vehicle was traveling. ment, can read the information if they have access to the These data can help provide a better understanding of vehicle or the EDR. the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the Children 12 years or younger should ride properly instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash Manual and on all the labels attached to the child statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in restraint. the rear seats rather than in the front. WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. NOTE: • For additional information, refer www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–732–8243. to • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http:// www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedriversThere are different sizes and types of restraints for childsafety-index-53.htm children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child 2 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Infants and Toddlers Small Children Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Recommended Type of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Infant and Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. WARNING! • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Children Too Large For Booster Seats 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone: If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat? 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way back? 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm? 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach? WARNING! Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly. 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for additional information on ALR. • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? Can the head restraints be removed? Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint? Weight limit of the Child Restraint Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint. No No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor. 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. Move the vehicle seat as far rearward as 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a possible to keep the child as far from the advanced “click.” passenger air bag as possible. 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. 2 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt now in the Automatic Locking mode. path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is in any direction. locked, you should not be able to pull out any webAny seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether lap portion around the child restraint while you push Anchorage: the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. WARNING! 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 WARNING! (Continued) tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle. Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint. This vehicle is equipped with a tether anchorage, located behind the front passenger seat, near the floor. Upper Tether Anchorage 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available. WARNING! An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. 2. Route the tether strap around the outboard side of the Transporting Pets head restraint to the tether anchorage. Deploying air bags could harm your pet. An unrestrained 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. passenger during panic braking or in an collision. 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Pets should be restrained in pet harnesses or pet carriers restraint manufacturer’s instructions. that are secured by seat belts. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 • Do not make any full throttle starts and avoid full throttle acceleration while cruising within the posted A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain speed limits of local traffic laws. (engine, transmission, and rear axle) in your new vehicle. • Use the proper gear for your speed range. Driving your vehicle with a new transmission requires no special techniques but, to reach optimal shifting quality • Wait until the engine has reached normal operating and help with engine Break-in, Dynamic and Race Mode temperature before driving at the recommended maxiwill be inhibited until the vehicle has accumulated 155 mum break-in speed. miles (250 km). • Avoid excessive idling. Additionally, for the first 200 miles (300 km), following these few simple guidelines is all that is necessary for a • Check the engine oil level at every fuel fill. good break-in. SAFETY TIPS ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS • Avoid very aggressive driving. Transporting Passengers • Avoid driving at a constant speed, either fast or slow, NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO for long periods. AREA. 2 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Exhaust Gas WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Vehicle system. Seat Belts Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open collision. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised or retractor condition, replace the belt. for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled to ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your 2 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside on while driving, have the system checked by an autho- The Vehicle rized dealer. Tires Defroster Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires for proper pressure. Floor Mat Safety Information Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. Lights Door Latches Check for positive closing, latching, and locking. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately. 2 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 ▫ Non-Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .88 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE DECKLID . . . . . . .88 ▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 ▫ Multifunction Lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 ▫ Folding Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 ▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 ▫ Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 ▫ Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 䡵 REMOVABLE SOFT TOP — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .79 ▫ High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 ▫ Installing The Soft Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 ▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 ▫ Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 3 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 ▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 ▫ Dimmer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 ▫ Interior Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .97 ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 ▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 ▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . . .99 䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 䡵 PARKING SENSORS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .103 ▫ Activation/Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 ▫ Acoustic Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 ▫ Indications On Display — If Equipped . . . . . .105 ▫ Fault Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 ▫ General Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 䡵 POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 䡵 CUPHOLDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ Seatback Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ Rear Compartment Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 3 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Inside Day/Night Mirror A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night Adjusting Rearview Mirror position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror Outside Mirrors should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle. WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror. 3 Power Mirror Control The power mirror controls consist of mirror select knob Power Mirrors and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, The power mirror controls are located on the center turn the power mirror control knob to the left or right to console. select the mirror that you want to adjust. 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. Folding Mirrors The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and normal. Folding Mirrors Heated Mirrors These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the mirror defroster. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 2. From the passenger side with the door open, move the two side locking handles towards each other and lift Your vehicle may be equipped with a removable soft top. the top from the retainers. 1. To remove the soft top turn the front locking handles located near the sun visors to the left one quarter turn. REMOVABLE SOFT TOP — IF EQUIPPED Side Locking Handles 3. Roll up the soft top to the center of the vehicle, repeat the procedure on the drivers side of the vehicle. Front Locking Handles 3 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2. Unfold the top and be sure to position the front edge (red strip) under the spoiler of the vehicle. Soft Top Removal 4. Remove the soft top with both sides rolled up and store it in the storage bag that is provided. Installing The Soft Top 1. With the doors open take the soft top and place it in center of the vehicle. Installing Top Under The Vehicle Spoiler 1 — Spoiler 2 — Red Strip UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 3. As the side beam is unrolled, engage the two fixed 4. Move the side locking handles inward and rotate locating pins (1 front, 1 rear) into their retainers. down the side beam. 3 Locating Pins Seating In The Vehicle Unlocking The Side Beam 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rotating The Side Beam Down Soft Top In Locking Position 5. Release the handles and complete the rotation to lock 6. Check to make sure that the handles are locked in the soft top. place. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 3 Handles In Locked Position 7. Repeat this procedure on both sides of the vehicle. Handles In Locked Position NOTE: 8. Insert the front locking handles located near the sun • Do not attach a roof rack on the soft top. visors in the proper holes and turn them to the right • Do not keep the soft top folded for long periods of one quarter turn. time. • Do not remove ice from the top with a sharp object. 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Do not put objects on the top. The object could fall if NOTE: the top is operated causing damage and injury. • Use of specific products is recommended for washing the top. • The cooled air flow into the passenger compartment may decrease if the automatic climate control system is • Bird droppings must be washed off immediately and on and the top is not all the way closed. thoroughly as the acid they contain is particularly aggressive. • With the top open and the vehicle travelling, the speech recognition system along with the dial number • Never use high-pressure washing systems. command, may not be recognized because of the • Hand washing is recommended; modern automatic background noise if equipped. washing systems equipped with soft brushes which do • With the top installed at speeds higher than 80 mph not apply excessive pressure and employ specific soft (130 Km/h), optimal comfort may not be achieved. top products may be used. The top fabric is treated with a special water repellent, • When using steam washers or high-pressure power waterproof product. The water-repellent properties will washers, maintain a suitable distance and do not degrade in time with exposure to the weather elements. exceed a maximum temperature of 140 °F (60 °C). Observe the following instructions for washing: Damage, alterations and water infiltrations may occur if the distance is too small. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 • If a water jet is used, direct away from the edges of the • Use specific waterproofing products for fabric tops fabric to prevent water infiltrations. and follow the instructions on the product container for best results. • Never use alcohol, petroleum products, chemical products, detergents, stain removers, wax, solvents, • The rubber seals of the top must be washed with water only. Apply talcum power or use specific rubber care and “wash and polish” products. products (silicone spray) if the seals are dry or partially • Remove as much dirt from the surface of the top with stuck. a soft brush or vacuum cleaner before washing it. This operation will considerably improve the final result. In SEATS lack of specific products, use water and mild soap Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the applied with a sponge preferably in the shade for vehicle. washing. Rinse the top with clean water after having eliminated all the stains. • Rinse immediately to remove soap to prevent stains. • Leave the vehicle in the shade after washing avoiding direct sunlight. WARNING! • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. (Continued) 3 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Manual Seats Forward And Rearward Adjustment The adjusting bar is at the front of the driver seat, near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. Seat Adjustment Bar Seat Height Adjustment In order to achieve the ideal driving position, the height of the seats can also be adjusted. Tools are required to make this height adjustment. Contact your authorized dealership. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Recliner Adjustment The recliner lever is located on the outboard side of the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, pull the recliner lever upward, lean backward until the seat is in the desired position, and release the lever. To return the seat to its full upright position, lean forward, pull the recliner lever upward and hold it until the seat returns to its full upright position. 3 Recline Lever WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. (Continued) 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Non-Adjustable Head Restraints The non-adjustable head restraints are form fitted into the upper structure of the seatback and are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. The seatback should be properly adjusted to an upright position where the head restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of your head. WARNING! Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched seatback could cause serious injury. TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE DECKLID CAUTION! • To prevent possible damage, do not slam the decklid to close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of the decklid to ensure the decklid latch is fully engaged. • During normal vehicle operation, the luggage compartment (located rear of the engine) can reach temperatures above 149 degrees. Do not transport (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 CAUTION! (Continued) objects in the luggage compartment that may be damaged at such temperatures. Do not place aerosol cans in the luggage compartment. 3 To open the decklid: 1. Open the drivers side door. 2. Pull the decklid release lever located on the rear of the drivers door sill. Decklid Release Lever 3. Move to the rear of the vehicle and lift the decklid. 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Decklid Lift Point Location Decklid Prop Rod Location 4. Lift upward on the decklid prop rod to release it from 1 — Decklid Prop Rod the stowage retainer. 2 — Stowage Retainer Location 5. Place the decklid prop rod in the decklid slot to secure the decklid in the open position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 WARNING! (Continued) Decklid Prop Rod Slot WARNING! • The maximum load limit for the luggage compartment, in addition to the kits provided, is 33.1 lbs. (15kg). Do not exceed the maximum permitted load (Continued) in the luggage compartment. When accessing the rear luggage compartment, do not come into contact with engine, or other components, that may be hot and could burn you if touched. • Access the luggage compartment only with the vehicle stationary. Before exiting the vehicle, you should always place the vehicle into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking brake, and remove the key from the ignition. Never leave the key fob in the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. • The decklid may drop suddenly, causing serious injury, if the supporting rod is not positioned correctly. • The decklid must always be closed properly, and the lock engaged, while the vehicle is in motions. 3 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights, headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals. NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Multifunction Lever Headlights Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward to the first detent for headlight operation. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 NOTE: The low beams and side/tail lights will not be on with DRL. High Beams 3 With the low beams activated, pull the multifunction lever towards the steering wheel to turn on the high beams. A high beam symbol will illuminate in the cluster to indicate the high beams are on. Pull the multifunction lever a second time to switch the headlights back to low beam. Headlight Operation Flash-To-Pass NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steerRunning Lights will be deactivated. ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to Daytime Running Lights turn on until the lever is released. To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol. 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Parking Lights Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond To turn on the parking lights, remove the key the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and times then automatically turn off. turn on the headlights. Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay — If Equipped Turn Signals When this feature is selected the driver can choose to Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time. on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show Activation proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is 30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to defective. a maximum of 210 seconds. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Deactivation Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and hold it for more than two seconds. Dimmer Controls 3 The dimmer controls are located on the left side of the instrument panel below the instrument cluster. Dimmer Controls Pushing the up or down arrow will increase or decrease the brightness of the instrument panel lights. 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Interior Light The interior light is located in the headliner in between the sun visors. The interior light can be set to three different positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right Position). Using the interior light lens, push the lens to the right from its center position and the lights are always on. Push the lens to the left from its center position and the lights are always off. Leave the lens in the center position, and the light is turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed. Interior Light (Off Position Shown) CAUTION! Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the Overhead Dome Lamp is in the center position or that the lights are off to avoid draining the battery. Interior Light Timing (Center Position) There are four different modes of operation that can be activated in this position: • When one door is opened a three minute timer is activated. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 • When the key is removed from the ignition (within two minutes of the ignition being turned off), a 10 second timer is activated. • When the doors are unlocked with the Key Fob a 10 second timer is activated. • When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights will turn off. WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotatIntermittent Wiper System ing a switch, located on the end of the lever. Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position. There are four possible delay intervals that depend on the vehicle speed. 3 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Windshield Wiper Operation Windshield Washers Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation. To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the delay range, the wiper will start and continue to operate for three wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. Mist If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off. Use the mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever upward to the mist position and release for a single wiping cycle. NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid. WARNING! Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column. To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Tilt/Telescoping Column Lever 3 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) up to the maximum speed of 105 mph (170 km/h). The Electronic Speed Control Lever is located on the left side of the steering column. NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control Electronic Speed Control Lever system can be reactivated rotating the end of the multiTo Activate function lever (On/Off) and resetting the desired vehicle Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to activate the set speed. Electronic Speed Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will illuminate. To turn the system off, rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the “O” position. The Cruise UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before moving the electronic speed turned off when not in use. control lever upward SET(+). WARNING! Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it. To Set A Desired Speed To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the RESUME/ CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory. Rotating the end of the multifunction lever to the “O” position or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory. To Resume Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, move the electronic speed To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUME control lever upward SET(+) and release. Release the button and release. Resume can be used at any speed accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected above 18 mph (30 km/h). speed. 3 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Vary The Speed Setting Metric Speed (km/h) • Tapping the Speed Control lever up (+) once will result in a 2 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inof the lever results in an increase of 2 km/h. crease speed by tapping the Speed Control lever up (+). The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of • If the lever is continually help up, the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released, then the U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: new set speed will be established. U.S. Speed (mph) To Decrease Speed • Tapping the Speed Control lever up (+) once will result When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap speed by tapping the Speed Control lever down (-). of the lever results in an increase of 1 mph. The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed • If the lever is continually help up, the set speed will of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: continue to increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed will be established. To Increase Speed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 U.S. Speed (mph) To Accelerate For Passing • Tapping the Speed Control lever down (-) once will Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse- pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. quent tap of the lever results in a decrease of 1 mph. PARKING SENSORS — IF EQUIPPED • If the lever is continually held down, the set speed will They are located in the rear bumper and their function is continue to decrease until the lever is released, then to detect the presence of any obstacles near the rear part the new set speed will be established. of the vehicle; they consequently inform the driver, Metric Speed (km/h) through an intermittent acoustic signal. • Tapping the Speed Control lever down (-) once will result in a 2 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the lever results in a decrease of 2 km/h. • If the lever is continually held down, the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released, then the new set speed will be established. 3 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Acoustic Signal When reverse gear is engaged and there is an obstacle behind the vehicle, an acoustic signal is emitted which varies according to the distance of the bumper from the obstacle. The frequency of the acoustic signal: • Increases as the distance between vehicle and obstacle decreases, culminating in a continuous acoustic signal when the distance is less than approximately 12 in (30 cm). Parking Sensors Activation/Deactivation • Decreases if the distance from the obstacle increases, until the signal ceases entirely. The sensors are automatically activated when reverse • Remains constant if the distance between vehicle and obstacle remains unchanged; if this situation concerns gear is engaged. As the obstacle behind the vehicle gets the side sensors, the signal will stop after approxicloser, the acoustic signal becomes more frequent. mately 3 seconds to avoid, for example, indications in the event of manoeuvres along a wall. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 If several obstacles are detected by the sensors, only the Obstacle presence and distance information is therefore provided both by the acoustic signal and the instrument nearest one is considered. panel display. Indications On Display — If Equipped The system indicates a detected obstacle by displaying an When the sensors are activated, the screen appears on the arc in one or more positions according to the distance of display. the obstacle and its position in relation to the vehicle. If an obstacle is detected in the rear central area, the display shows all the arcs in the rear central area, up to the one that corresponds to the position of the obstacle itself. The signal is similar for obstacles in the rear left or right area. The arc that corresponds to the position of the obstacle will flash. The color on the display depends on the distance from and position of the obstacle. Parking Sensors Screen 3 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows a single constant arc and emits a continuous sound. If there are several obstacles, the closest one is indicated. Fault Indication Some conditions may influence the performance of the parking sensors: • The presence of ice, snow, mud or multiple layers of paint on the sensor surface may cause reduced sensitivity of the sensor itself and therefore reduce the system performance. Parking sensor failures, if any, will be indicated when warn- • Mechanical interference (e.g washing the vehicle, rain, reverse is engaged by the switching on of the strong wind, hail) may cause the sensor to detect a ing light on the instrument panel together with the non-existent obstacle (“echo interference”). message on the display. • The presence of ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic General Warnings brake systems of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the When parking, take the utmost care over obstacles that vehicle could alter the signals sent by the sensor. may be above or under the sensor. • The variation in sensor position, caused by variation in Under certain circumstances, objects close to the vehicle ride (due to suspension component wear), changing are not detected by the system and could therefore cause tires, overloaded vehicle, or tuning that lowers the damage to the vehicle or be damaged themselves. vehicle, for example, may affect parking sensor system performance. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 NOTE: The sensor must be free from mud, dirt snow or ice in order for the system to operate correctly. Be careful not to scratch or damage the sensors while cleaning them. Avoid using dry, rough or hard cloths. The sensors must be washed using clean water, with the addition of car shampoo if necessary. When using special washing equipment such as high pressure jets or steam cleaning, clean the sensors very quickly keeping the jet more than 4 in (10 cm) away. Also, do not apply stickers to the sensors. CAUTION! • The Parking Sensor system is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Parking Sensor system in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using the Parking Sensor system. WARNING! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Parking Sensor system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. 3 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The power outlet is located on the central tunnel, beYour vehicle is equipped with a 12 Volt (13 Amp) power tween the two cup holders. It only operates with the outlet that can be used to power cellular phones, small ignition key at MAR-ON. electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. POWER OUTLETS Power Outlet Fuse Location Front Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. CAUTION! • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. (Continued) CAUTION! • Do not exceed the maximum power of 180 Watts (15 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 180 Watts (15 Amps) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. (Continued) 3 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF EQUIPPED The cigar lighter and ash receiver are located on the central tunnel. To activate the cigar lighter, push the button down. After a few seconds the button automatically returns to its initial position, and the cigar lighter is ready for use. NOTE: • Always check that the cigar lighter is switched off. • Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 W to the socket. • Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable adaptors. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 CUPHOLDER STORAGE A cupholder is located in the rear of the center console. Seatback Storage Located in the back of both the driver and passenger front seats are pockets that can be used for storage. Center Console Cupholder Drivers Side Seatback Storage 3 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Console Features There is a cargo pouch storage area located between the driver and passengers seat. Rear Compartment Storage CAUTION! • To prevent possible damage, do not slam the decklid to close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of the decklid to ensure the decklid latch is fully engaged. • During normal vehicle operation, the luggage compartment (located rear of the engine) can reach temperatures above 149 degrees. Do not transport objects in the luggage compartment that may be damaged at such temperatures. Do not place aerosol cans in the luggage compartment. Cargo Pouch Storage Location Your vehicle is equipped with a storage area located under the decklid. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 WARNING! (Continued) vehicle is unattended. Once in the rear storage compartment, young children may not be able to escape. If trapped in the rear compartment, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke. As a security measure, an internal decklid emergency release lever is built into the rear compartment storage latching mechanism. In a event of a person trapped inside the storage compartment, the decklid can be simply opened by pulling on the phosphorescent handle attached to the decklid latching mechanism. Decklid Emergency Release WARNING! Do not allow children to have access to rear storage compartment. Always close the hood when your (Continued) 3 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) Rear Compartment Light WARNING! • The maximum load limit for the luggage compartment (located rear of the engine), in addition to the kits provided, is 33 lbs. (15kg). Do not exceed the (Continued) maximum permitted load in the luggage compartment. When accessing the rear luggage compartment, do not come into contact with engine, or other components, that may be hot and could burn you if touched. • Access the luggage compartment only with the vehicle stationary. Before exiting the vehicle, you should always place the vehicle into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking brake, and remove the key from the ignition. Never leave the key fob in the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. • The decklid may drop suddenly, causing serious injury, if the supporting rod is not positioned correctly. • The decklid must always be closed properly, and the lock engaged, while the vehicle is in motions. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS 䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .117 䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) 䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .120 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 ▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 ▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System . . . . . . . .155 ▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .129 ▫ Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 ▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .139 ▫ Values Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 ▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .142 䡵 CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 䡵 RADIO SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 4 116 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .162 䡵 HEATING AND VENTILATION . . . . . . . . . . . .163 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 ▫ Manual Climate Controls With A/C . . . . . . . .163 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 4 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — Climate Control Air Outlets Exterior Light Lever Instrument Cluster Washer/Wiper Lever Passenger Air Bag 6 7 8 9 — Switch Bank (A/C/Door Lock Switch/Door Mirror Demisting) — Climate Controls — Driver Air Bag — EVIC Control Buttons 118 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119 1. Temperature Gauge • The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. • The digital gauge will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, or up mountain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. WARNING! A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph. NOTE: Driving with a hot engine cooling system could 2. Tachometer damage your vehicle. The digital warning light may • This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute switch on (together with a message on the display) to (RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area, indicate that the coolant temperature is too high; in this ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage. case, stop the engine and contact a dedicated authorized 3. Speedometer dealership. • Indicates vehicle speed. 4 120 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 4. Fuel Gauge • The digital display shows the amount of fuel in the tank. • The switching on of the digital warning light indicates that 1 – 1.3 gallons of fuel are left in the tank; in this situation, refuel as soon as possible. • Do not travel with the fuel tank almost empty; any gaps in fuel delivery could damage the catalytic converter. WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the to the side of the event of a failure indication. The fuel pump symbol points vehicle where the fuel door is located. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon 5. “Alfa DNA” Driving Mode Indicator equipment options and current vehicle status. Some • This area of the cluster displays which driving mode telltales are optional and may not appear. the vehicle is currently in. A letter (d, n, or a) corresponding to the active driving mode (dynamic or race, natural, all weather) and a dedicated message is shown on the display. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121 Red Telltale Indicator Lights Brake Warning Light Red Telltale Light United States Canada What It Means Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. 4 122 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked. WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the sary. ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. tion. Oil Pressure Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. 4 124 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/ RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125 Air Bag Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. 4 126 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127 Transmission Fault Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Transmission Fault Warning Light This light will illuminate (together with a message in the EVIC and a buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the message remains after restarting the engine. Battery Charge Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Battery Charge Warning Light This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component. If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.” 4 128 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Engine Temperature Warning Light Red Warning Light What It Means Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4 minutes, or until the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129 Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence. IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. 4 130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131 CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. 4 132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Generic Warning Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Generic Warning Indicator Light The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following conditions occur: Oil Change Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off Not Available, Parking Sensor Failure, DST System Failure. Passenger Air Bag Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Passenger Air Bag Indicator Light This light should come and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned to the START or ON/RUN position. If the light stays on, or comes on while driving it may indicate a problem with a passenger air bag system, if the light flickers it may indicate an air bag warning bag failure. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133 Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indicate function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and stays on at road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. 4 134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135 Yellow Telltale Light What It Means greater than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN. • Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive. • This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event. 4 136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137 CAUTION! WARNING! Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. 4 138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Service Warning Indicator Light – If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Service Warning Indicator Light The “Scheduled Servicing Plan” includes vehicle maintenance at fixed intervals, refer to the ⬙Maintenance⬙ chapter. This message is displayed automatically along with the warning light when the key is turned to MAR-ON - 1242 miles (2,000 km) before these deadlines and reappears every 124 miles (200 km). Below 124 miles (200 km) servicing indications are more frequent. The indication will appear in miles or kilometers according to the ⬙Unit Of Measurement⬙ settings. When the next scheduled service is approaching and the key is turned to MAR-ON, the word Service will appear on the display, followed by the number of miles or kilometers left. Contact a dedicated authorized dealership. The operations in the “Scheduled Servicing Plan” will be performed and the message will be reset. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139 Green Telltale Indicator Lights Turn Signal Indicator Lights Green Telltale Light What It Means Turn Signal Indicator Lights The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT). NOTE: • A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. 4 140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped Green Telltale Light What It Means Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light Green Telltale Light What It Means Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141 Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light Green Telltale Light What It Means Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light This light will turn on when the cruise control has been engaged. Door Mirror Defrost Indicator Light Green Telltale Light What It Means Door Mirror Defrost Indicator Light This indicator will illuminate when the Door Mirror Defrost button on the instrument panel is pushed to the ON position. 4 142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL White Telltale Indicator Lights Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light White Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON. Blue Telltale Indicator Lights High Beam Indicator Light Blue Telltale Light What It Means High Beam Indicator Light This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. The EVIC consists of the following: • Digital Speedometer • Vehicle Info • Fuel Economy Info • Trip Info • Screen Setup • Vehicle Settings Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) 4 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button pushing the following buttons mounted on the instruPush and release the UP arrow button to scroll ment panel to the left of the steering column: upward through the main menu and submenus or to increase the displayed value. Outside of the menu, the UP arrow will adjust the brightness of the instrument panel. • DOWN Arrow Button Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu and submenus or to decrease the displayed value. Outside of the menu, the DOWN arrow will adjust the brightness of the instrument panel. • SET/BACK Arrow Button EVIC Control Buttons Push and release the SET/BACK arrow button to access/ select the information screens or submenu screens of a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145 main menu item. Push and hold the SET/BACK arrow • Set Date button to return to the main menu from an info screen or • Autoclose submenu item. • Units Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • Language Setup Menu The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a • Buzzer Volume cycle. Push the UP and DOWN arrow buttons to • Service access the different options and settings (setup). The setup menu can be activated by pushing the SET/ • Daylights (D.R.L.) – If Equipped BACK button. Single push on the UP or DOWN • Exit Menu arrow button will scroll through the setup menu Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without options. The menu includes the following functions: Submenu • Menu 1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to select the main • Speed Buzzer menu option to set. • Trip B/Data • Set Time or DOWN arrow button (by a 2. Push the UP single push) to select the new setting. 4 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to store the new 5. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to store the new setting and go back to the main menu option previsetting and go back to the previously selected subously selected. menu option. Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Sub- 6. Push and hold the SET/BACK button to return to the menu main menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold). 1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to display the first submenu option. Speed Buzzer (Speed Limit) or DOWN arrow button (by a With this function, it is possible to set the vehicle speed 2. Push the UP single push) to scroll through all the submenu limit (MPH or km/h) to immediately alert the driver when the set limit is exceeded. options. 3. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to select the dis- To set the speed limit, proceed as follows: played submenu option and to open the relevant setup 1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button. The display will menu. show the message (Speed Buzzer). or DOWN arrow button (by a 4. Push the UP or DOWN arrow 2. Push and release the UP single push) to select the new setting for this button to select speed limit activation (On) or submenu option. deactivation (Off). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 3. When the function is activated (On), briefly push the To cancel the setting, proceed as follows: SET/BACK button to display the previously set speed. 1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button. “On” will display. or DOWN arrow buttons Pushing the UP selects the speed limit. Push SET/BACK to confirm 2. Push and release the DOWN button. “Off” will selection. display. NOTE: The setting can be increased or decreased by 5 3. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to go back to the or DOWN arrow MPH or km/h each time the UP menu screen, or push and hold the SET/BACK button button is pushed for speed settings above 20 MPH (approximately one second) to go back to the main (32 km/h). To increase or decrease the set speed screen without storing the settings. or DOWN arrow rapidly, push and hold the UP Trip B Activation button. Save the setting by briefly pushing the button Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) or when you approach the required setting. deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display. • Briefly push the SET/BACK button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the SET/BACK button For further information, see “Trip Computer.” (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. 4 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL For activation/deactivation, proceed as follows: Proceed as follows: 1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button. “On” or “Off” 1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button. The display will show the two sub-menu items “Time” and “Mode.” will display in the EVIC (according to previous setting). 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow or DOWN arrow button to navigate the two sub-menu items. 2. Push and release the UP button to select the setting and once selected a beep 3. Select the required option and then push the SET/ will occur to signal the setting is saved. BACK button. 3. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to go back to the 4. When accessing the “Time” sub-menu item, briefly menu screen, or push and hold the SET/BACK button push the SET/BACK button and “hours” will flash on (approximately one second) to go back to the main the display. screen without storing the settings. or DOWN arrow 5. Push and release the UP Set Time button for setting. This function may be used to set the clock through two 6. Briefly push the SET/BACK button and “minutes” sub-menu items: “Time” and “Mode.” will flash on the display. 7. Push and release the UP button for setting. or DOWN arrow UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 sub-menu screen, or push and hold the SET/BACK • The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each button (approximately one second) to go back to the or DOWN arrow button is main screen without storing the settings. time the UP pushed. Push and hold the button to increase/ Set Date decrease the setting rapidly. Save the setting by This function may be used to set the date (day - month briefly pushing the button when you approach the year). required setting. • Briefly push the SET/BACK button to return to the To change the date, proceed as follows: NOTE: “Time” sub-function. 1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button and “year” will flash on the display. • When accessing the “Mode” submenu, briefly push the SET/BACK button. The previously set display 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow format will flash on the display. button for setting. or DOWN arrow 3. Briefly push the SET/BACK button and “month” will • Push and release the UP button to select “24h” or “12h.” flash on the display. When you have selected the required settings, briefly 4. Push and release the UP push the SET/BACK button to go back to the Time, Mode button for setting. or DOWN arrow 4 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5. Briefly push the SET/BACK button and “day” will Autoclose flash on the display. With this function active, the doors will automatically or DOWN button for lock at when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 MPH 6. Push and release the UP (20 km/h). setting. NOTE: The setting will increase or decrease by one unit To change the setting, proceed as follows: or DOWN arrow button is each time the UP 1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button “On” or “Off” will pushed. Push and hold the UP or DOWN arrow flash on the display (according to the previous setbutton to increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Save ting). the setting by briefly pushing the button when you or DOWN arrow 2. Push and release the UP approach the required setting. button for setting. • Briefly push the SET/BACK button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the SET/BACK button 3. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the SET/BACK button (approximately one second) to go back to the main (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. screen without storing the settings. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 5. Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button for setting. This function may be used to set the measurement unit in three submenus: “Distance,” “Temperature” and “Fuel 6. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to return to the Economy.” sub-menu. Units (Set Units) To set the required unit, proceed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 7. When accessing the “Fuel Economy” submenu, briefly push the SET/BACK button. Either “mpg,” “km/l ” or Briefly push the SET/BACK button to display the “l/100km” will appear on the display (according to three sub-menus. the previous setting). or DOWN arrow Push and release the UP If the distance unit set is “mi,” the fuel economy unit will button to navigate the three sub-menus. be displayed in “mpg.” Select the required sub-menu and then briefly push If the distance unit set is “km,” the fuel economy unit will the SET/BACK button. be displayed in either km/l or l/100km. When accessing the “Distance” submenu, briefly push or DOWN arrow the SET/BACK button. Either “mi” or “km” will 1. Push and release the UP button for setting. appear on the display (according to the previous setting). 2. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to return to the sub-menu. 4 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. When accessing the “Temperature” submenu, briefly To set the required language, proceed as follows: push the SET/BACK button. Either “°F” or “°C” will 1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button. The previously appear on the display (according to the previous set “language” will flash on the display. setting). 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow or DOWN arrow 4. Push and release the UP button for setting. button for setting. 3. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to go back to the 5. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to return to the menu screen, or push and hold the SET/BACK button sub-menu. (approximately one second) to go back to the main When you have made the required settings, briefly push screen without storing the settings. the SET/BACK button to go back to the sub-menu screen, Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning or push and hold the SET/BACK button (approximately Buzzer Volume) one second) to go back to the main screen without storing With this function, the volume of the buzzer accompanythe settings. ing any failure/warning indication can be adjusted to Language (Selecting The Language) one of eight volume levels. The messages can be displayed in the following languages: Italian, English (USA), German, Portuguese, Spanish, French, Chinese, Russian, and Mexican. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 To adjust the volume, proceed as follows: Service (Scheduled Servicing) — If Equipped 1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button. The previously With this function, it is possible to view information on mileage intervals for servicing. set volume “level” will flash on the display. 2. Push and release the UP button for setting. or DOWN arrow To obtain this information, proceed as follows: Push the SET/BACK button briefly. The dis3. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to go back to the play shows the service interval in miles (mi) or kilomemenu screen, or push and hold the SET/BACK button ters (km) according to the previous setting (see the ⬙Unit (approximately one second) to go back to the main Of Measurement⬙ paragraph). screen without storing the settings. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to go back to the menu screen or hold the button down to go back to the standard screen. 4 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: The “Scheduled Servicing Plan” includes vehicle maintenance at fixed intervals, refer to the ⬙Maintenance⬙ chapter. This message is displayed automatically along warning light when the key is turned to with the MAR-ON - 1242 miles (2,000 km) before these deadlines and reappears every 124 miles (200 km). Below 124 miles (200 km) servicing indications are more frequent. The indication will appear in miles or kilometers according to the ⬙Unit Of Measurement⬙ settings. When the next scheduled service is approaching and the key is turned to MAR-ON, the word Service will appear on the display, followed by the number of miles or kilometers left. Contact a dedicated Alfa Romeo Dealership. The operations in the “Scheduled Servicing Plan” will be performed and the message will be reset. Daytime Running Lamps This function may be used to activate/deactivate the Daytime Running Lamps. Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off: 1. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to display the three submenus. 2. Briefly push the SET/BACK button. “On” or “Off” will flash on the display (according to previous setting). 3. Push and release the UP button for setting. or DOWN arrow 4. Briefly push the SET/BACK button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 Exit Menu Reset of the Oil Change Reminder message as follows: This function closes the initial menu screen. 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to the MAR/AVV position (do not start the engine). Briefly push the SET/BACK button to go back to the main screen. 2. Press and hold the accelerator pedal. arrow button to return to 3. Press and release the brake pedal 6 times; with a 1 Push and release the UP the first menu option (Speed Buzzer). second pause between each press. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to return 4. After the 6th release of the brake pedal, pause 1 second to the last menu option (Daylights). and then release the accelerator pedal. Change Engine Oil Indicator System Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds and the Oil Pressure Warning Light will illuminate. The “Change Engine Oil” message in the EVIC and the Oil Pressure Warning Light will turn off after approximately 10 seconds. Trip Computer The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It features a driver-interactive display (displays information such as trip information, range, fuel consumption, average speed, and travel time). Trip Button The TRIP button, located on the right steering column stalk, can be used to display and to reset the trip values. 4 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Trip Functions Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new trip). “Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to: • Range • Average Fuel Consumption • Travel Distance • Current Fuel Consumption Trip Button • Average speed • A short button push displays the different values. • Travel time • A long button push resets the system and then starts a new trip. “Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to: • Average Fuel Consumption • Travel Distance UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 • Average speed • Travel time • Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the system. NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of “Current Trip” can be used to display the figures relating the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the inforto: mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip reset. B Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption” Start Of Trip Procedure cannot be reset. With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for New Trip over one second to reset. To reset: Exit Trip • Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have manually. been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than • When the “Trip distance” reaches 99999.9 miles or kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59 (999 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset automatically. one second. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing settings. 4 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Values Displayed Indications On Display Each time a value is selected, the following information is shown in the EVIC: • “Trip A” or “Trip B” location(s) • Name, value and unit of measure of the selected value (e.g. ⬙Range 520 mi⬙). After a few seconds, the name of the selected value is replaced by the corresponding icon. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 Range Travel Distance This indicates the distance which may be traveled with This value shows the distance covered since the last reset. the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving Current Fuel Consumption conditions will not change. The message “----” will This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is conappear on the display in the following cases: stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the • Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km). display if the vehicle is parked with the engine running. • The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine Average Speed running. This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a funcNOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset. style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads, etc.), conditions of use of the vehicle (load, tire pressure, Travel Time etc.). Trip planning must take into account the above This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset. notes. Tire Pressure Values Average Fuel Consumption This screen will display OK at each Tire Pressure MoniThis value shows the approximate average consumption toring sensor. Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” since the last reset. in “Starting And Operating.” 4 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These installed. networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in WARNING! your vehicle to function properly. CYBERSECURITY Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems. • It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. • ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it (Continued) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 WARNING! (Continued) may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached. • As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately. NOTE: Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. RADIO SYSTEM The radio system consists of: • FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding • Supply cables for radio, speakers and aerial software updates. • To help further improve vehicle security and minimize • Radio the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners • Antenna located on the inside of the front fascia should: • Two tweeter speakers with 6 inch (38 mm) diameter • Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareand two mid-woofer speakers with 20 inch (130 mm) update to learn about available Uconnect software diameter, fitted on the doors updates. • Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs). 4 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: Be sure to press the RESET button when using the unit for the first time, after changing the vehicle battery, or using the battery disconnect (anytime the vehicle loses power). General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: For further information on radio functions and use, refer • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by to the dedicated Supplement attached to the On-Board the party responsible for compliance could void the Documentation. user’s authority to operate the equipment. RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES • This device may not cause harmful interference. Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in • This device must accept any interference received, your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from including interference that may cause undesired opyour radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated eration. by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 HEATING AND VENTILATION 1. A/C Button Manual Climate Controls With A/C Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged. MAX A/C For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation modes at the same time. ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired, press the A/C switch to turn OFF the A/C compressor. Then, rotate the temperature control to the desired temperature. 2. Demist/Defrost Control Press and release the Demist/Defrost Control button to turn ON the heated outside mirrors. The Demist/Defrost The Heating/Ventilation And Air Conditioning Controls feature automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes. consist of a series of three rotary dials, a movable cursor and two on/off switches. Heating/Ventilation And Air Conditioning Controls 4 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Mode Control Mix – Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that Panel require extra heat to the windshield. This set– Air is directed through the outlets in the instru- ting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct moisture on the windshield. airflow. 4. Recirculation Control Bi-Level Slide cursor to change the system between recirculation Rotate this control to change the system between Modes (Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost). – Air is directed through the panel and floor mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used outlets. when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Floor – Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 speed increases as you move the control clockwise from • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds. the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Heating Extended use of this mode is not recommended. To heat the passenger compartment, proceed as follows: • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, 1. Rotate the Temperature Control to the red section. because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Se- 2. Turn the Blower Control to the desired speed. lect the outside air position for maximum defogging. . 3. Turn the Mode Control to 5. Temperature Control 4. Then operate the controls to maintain the desired Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air comfort conditions. inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial counterclockwise into the blue area of the scale indicates NOTE: cooler temperatures, while rotating clockwise into the red • This air distribution allows the passenger compartarea indicates warmer temperatures. ment to be heated quickly. 6. Blower Control • When the engine is cold, it takes a few minutes to NOTE: Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower achieve optimum passenger compartment heating. 4 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Fast Demisting/Defrosting Of Windshield And Side Windows Proceed as follows: 1. Rotate the Temperature Control to the red section. 2. Turn the Blower Control to 4 (maximum fan speed). 3. Turn the Mode Control to . 4. Move the Recirculation Control to Window Demisting In the event of considerable external moisture and/or rain and/or large differences in temperature inside and outside the passenger compartment, perform the following preventive window demisting procedure: 1. Move the Recirculation Control to . 2. Rotate the Temperature Control to the red section. . 3. Turn the Blower Control to 2 (intermediate fan speed). After demisting/defrosting, operate the controls as norwith the possibility of 4. Turn the Mode Control to mal to restore the required comfort conditions. if window misting does not moving it to position occur. NOTE: The climate control system is very useful for speeding up and maintaining demisting since it dehuVentilation midifies the air. Adjust the controls as described previously and switch on the climate control system by To ventilate the passenger compartment properly, proceed as follows: pressing the A/C button. 1. Fully open the vents and direct them appropriately. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 2. Rotate the Temperature Control to the blue section. 3. Move the Recirculation Control to . 4. Turn the Blower Control to the desired speed. 5. Turn the Mode Control to . Climate Control Internal Air Recirculation Activation • Move the Recirculation Control to NOTE: The internal air recirculation system makes it possible to reach the required heating or ventilation conditions more quickly. Do not use the internal air recirculation function on rainy/cold days to avoid the possibility of the windows misting. . Proceed as follows: 1. Rotate the Temperature Control to the blue section. It is advisable to switch the internal air recirculation on while standing in queues or in tunnels to prevent the 2. Turn the Blower Control to 1 (1st fan speed). For rapid introduction of polluted air. cooling, turn Blower Control to 4 (maximum fan speed). Do not use the function for a long time, particularly if . there are two people on board, to prevent the windows 3. Move the Recirculation Control to from misting. 4. Turn the Mode Control to . 5. Press the A/C button. 4 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Cooling Adjustment Door Mirror Demisting Proceed as follows: 1. Move the Recirculation Control to . 2. Rotate the Temperature Control towards the red section to increase the temperature. 3. Turn the Blower Control counterclockwise to reduce the fan speed. Demist/Defrost Button • Press the button to activate this function. • Press the button again to deactivate the function. Activation is indicated by the digital warning light on the display. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 System Maintenance In winter, the climate control system must be turned on at least once a month for about 10 minutes. Have the system inspected at an authorized dealer before the summer. NOTE: The system uses R-1234yf coolant which does not pollute the environment in the event of accidental leakage. Under no circumstances should you use R-134a fluid which, in addition to being incompatible with the system’s components, contributes greatly to the greenhouse effect. 4 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS 䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 䡵 ALFA DNA SYSTEM (DYNAMIC VEHICLE CONTROL SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 ▫ Driving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 ▫ System Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 ▫ Launch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Turbo Charger “Cool Down” . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 SIX-SPEED ALFA TWIN CLUTCH TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Using The Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 . . .184 . . .185 . . .189 . . .189 . . .190 . . .190 . . .190 . . .191 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 5 172 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 ▫ Hydraulic Brake Assistant System (HBA) . . . .202 䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 ▫ Electronic Q2 System (E-Q2) . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 ▫ Ready Alert Brake System (RAB) . . . . . . . . . .203 䡵 ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL) SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 ▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 ▫ System Intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 ▫ Electronic Brake Distribution System (EBD) . . .197 ▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .198 ▫ Cornering Brake Control System (CBC) . . . . . .199 ▫ Drag Torque Control System (DTC) . . . . . . . .199 ▫ AntiSlip Regulation System (ASR) . . . . . . . . .200 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .207 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .209 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .210 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .215 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 ▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .218 ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 STARTING AND OPERATING 173 ▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1750 Turbo . . . . . . .234 ▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .236 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 ▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .227 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .228 䡵 ADDING FUEL/SMART FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .242 5 174 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic Transmission Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both To start the engine, press the brake pedal. The system inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. engages NEUTRAL (N) automatically. WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. After the starting procedure, FIRST (1st) gear or REVERSE (R) can be engaged. Irrespective of the mode selected (AUTO/MANUAL), to engage FIRST (1st) gear or REVERSE (R), it is necessary to press the brake pedal and push the 1 button on the transmission control panel (or the ⬙+⬙ steering wheel stalk) to engage FIRST (1st) gear or the R button to engage REVERSE (R). When FIRST (1st) gear is engaged, the system sets itself to AUTO mode. NEUTRAL (N) can be engaged again by pushing the N button with the brake pedal pressed. STARTING AND OPERATING 175 When the 1, N or R buttons are pushed (or ⬙+⬙ steering Cold Weather Operation wheel stalk is operated) without pressing the brake Your engine is designed to operate at temperatures as pedal, no gear change request is implemented by the low as 0°F (-18°C). system. NOTE: REVERSE (R) cannot be engaged by pushing the ⬙-⬙ stalk on the steering wheel. Normal Starting CAUTION! Use of the recommended SAE 5W-40 Synthetic oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is important to prevent engine damage and ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions. NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. If Engine Fails To Start Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START) position and release it when the engine starts. If the WARNING! engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury. 5 176 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with a Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. • To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up. Turbo Charger “Cool Down” This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump will run for up to five minutes after the engine has been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger. Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is normal to hear it running during this time. SIX-SPEED ALFA TWIN CLUTCH TRANSMISSION WARNING! • It is dangerous to shift out of NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 177 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. • Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the vehicle into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) Using The Transmission This vehicle is equipped with a Six-Speed Alfa Twin Clutch transmission with steering wheel mounted shift paddles. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission controls (shift paddles on the steering wheel, and gear selector buttons on the center console) are disabled. 5 178 STARTING AND OPERATING When the key is turned to the ON position, the current transmission gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster, along with the ⬙AUTO⬙ indicator. This indicates the transmission is in Automatic mode. Operating Modes The transmission has two normal operating modes (except when the “Race” mode is selected on the DNA switch): • MANUAL mode: The driver must shift gears manually (using the steering wheel mounted shift paddles). • Automatic (AUTO) mode: The system shifts between all forward gears automatically. When the “Race” mode is selected via the DNA selector, the only allowed transmission operating mode is MANUAL. MANUAL Mode Transmission Gear Selector In this operating mode, the driver is responsible for choosing the best gear to engage, depending on the vehicles operating conditions. The current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster. STARTING AND OPERATING 179 To activate/deactivate MANUAL mode, push the A/M NOTE: To provide better comfort, the transmission will button on the center console when the transmission is in up-shift to the next available gear if the engine speed limit is reached. This feature is only available in NATUany forward gear. RAL and ALL WEATHER Modes. Use the “+” shift paddle to engage a higher gear, or the “–” paddle to engage a lower gear. AUTO Mode If a requested gear shift is not allowed (typically, because it would cause engine overspeed or lugging), an acoustic signal will sound and the transmission will remain in the existing gear. In AUTO mode the transmission shifts gears automatically depending on vehicle speed, engine RPM, and accelerator pedal position. AUTO is the default operating mode at startup. When in The transmission will automatically downshift during AUTO mode, ⬙AUTO⬙ appears in the instrument cluster, closed-throttle decelerations, to prevent engine lugging. adjacent to the current gear display. When coming to a stop, the transmission will automati- To toggle between AUTO and MANUAL modes, push cally select FIRST (1st) gear. The driver must manually the A/M button on the center console. upshift the transmission (by tapping the + shift paddle) as the vehicle accelerates. 5 180 STARTING AND OPERATING • The vehicle can only be launched (from a stop) in FIRST (1st) or REVERSE (R). SECOND (2nd) gear (or FIRST (1st) and REVERSE (R) can only be engaged (at a higher) cannot be engaged when the vehicle is stationstop) by pushing “1” or “R” when the brake pedal is ary. pressed. • If the brake pedal is not depressed (and the vehicle is To drive, press the brake pedal, and select 1 (1st) or R stationary for a period of time), the transmission will (REVERSE) by pushing “1” or “R” using the transmission automatically engage NEUTRAL (N). gear selector buttons on the center console. Then release the brake pedal and smoothly press the accelerator pedal. • FIRST (1st) and REVERSE (R) gears can only be engaged at vehicle speeds below 2 mph (3 km/h). At NOTE: speeds below 6 mph (10 km/h), attempts to shift from • The vehicle will not “creep” when the brake pedal is 1st to R (or R to 1st) will only be allowed if the vehicle released, and may in fact roll down on an incline. speed drops below the 2 mph (3 km/h) threshold within three seconds of the request; otherwise, the Leaving from a stop, the accelerator pedal must be transmission will shift to NEUTRAL (N). The driver pressed to transmit driving torque to the wheels. should then repeat the request for 1st or R once the • When starting on a fairly steep incline, it may be vehicle has come to a stop. helpful to engage the parking brake. Accelerating From A Stop STARTING AND OPERATING 181 Shift Paddles command multiple shifts; the paddle must be pressed multiple times in succession to generate multiple shifts. In MANUAL mode, the steering wheel mounted shift paddles (labeled + and -) control the transmission shift- Neutral (N) ing. Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged Tapping the (+) paddle will upshift the transmission to periods with the engine running. Always apply the the next higher gear, while tapping the (-) paddle will parking brake if you must leave the vehicle. downshift to the next lower gear. The current gear is At engine startup, the transmission will automatically displayed in the instrument cluster. If a requested shift select NEUTRAL (N) and AUTO mode. The brake pedal would cause engine lugging or overspeed, that request must be pressed when starting the engine. will be ignored. To select NEUTRAL (N) when the vehicle is stationary, In AUTO mode, tapping a shift paddle will temporarily turn the ignition key to the MAR-ON position (engine place the transmission in MANUAL mode, and execute running or not), press the brake pedal, and push the N the requested upshift or downshift (if allowable). The button on the transmission gear selector. transmission will then return to AUTO mode after a brief When the vehicle is moving (with ignition ON), pushing interval. the NEUTRAL (N) button will engage N, regardless of Pressing a shift paddle will only shift the transmission whether the brake pedal is pressed. one gear at a time. Holding a paddle depressed will not 5 182 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. Coasting in NEUTRAL and turning off the ignition while coasting severely limit your ability to respond to changing traffic or road conditions. Failure to follow this WARNING may result in your loss of vehicle control, collision and serious injury or death. Acoustic Signal If the vehicle is stationary with the engine running and FIRST (1st) gear or REVERSE (R) engaged, the system activates an acoustic signal and automatically places the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) when: • The accelerator and/or brake pedal are not operated for at least three minutes. • The brake pedal is pressed for longer than 10 minutes. With the vehicle in motion, to engage a gear from the • The driver’s door is opened and the accelerator pedal NEUTRAL (N) position, push the 1 button on the transor the brake pedal are not operated for at least one and mission control panel (it is not necessary to press the a half seconds. brake pedal). The transmission will engage the correct • A fault has been detected in the transmission. gear according to the vehicles speed. STARTING AND OPERATING 183 Parking The Vehicle General Notes When parking and leaving the vehicle, proceed as fol- When the vehicle is stopped and in gear, always keep the lows: brake pedal pressed until you decide to set off, then release the brake and accelerate gradually. 1. Make sure that the vehicle has come to a complete stop. During prolonged stops with the engine running, it is advisable to keep the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). 2. With the brake pedal depressed, put the vehicle into either a forward or reverse gear by pressing 1 or R. When stopped on an incline, always hold the vehicle in (The vehicle may already be in 1 or R if you were just place using the brakes. On steep inclines, Hill Start Assist driving.) (HSA) will temporarily hold the vehicle in position when the brake pedal is released. If the accelerator pedal is not 3. Engage the parking brake. applied after a short time, the vehicle will roll back. 4. Turn off and remove the key. Either reapply the brake (to hold the vehicle) or press the accelerator to climb the hill. 5. Release the brake. Only shift between FIRST (1st) and REVERSE (R) when When parking on an incline, turn the front wheels toward completely stopped, with the brake pedal pressed. the curb on a downhill slope and away from the curb on an uphill slope. Always chock the wheels when parking When necessary, it is possible to engage FIRST (1st), on steep grades. REVERSE (R) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine off, the 5 184 STARTING AND OPERATING key at MAR-ON and the brake pressed. In this case, wait • All Weather (mode for driving in poor grip conditions, such as rain and snow [A]). at least five seconds between one gear change and the next, in order to safeguard the operation of the hydraulic • Race (sports driving mode [D]). system, and the pump in particular. This also acts on the dynamic vehicle control systems For uphill departures, accelerate gradually but fully, (engine, gearbox/transmission, ESC system). immediately after releasing the parking brake or the brake pedal; this allows the engine speed to increase to provide more torque at the wheels. ALFA DNA SYSTEM (DYNAMIC VEHICLE CONTROL SYSTEM) This vehicle is equipped with a “Alfa DNA” system lever (located on the center console). There are four modes of operation to be selected according to driving style and road conditions: • Dynamic (This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift schedule for sportier driving [D]). • Natural (mode for driving in normal conditions [N]). Alfa DNA Mode Selector STARTING AND OPERATING 185 Driving Modes NOTE: Dynamic Mode will be inhibited until the vehicle has accumulated 155 miles (250 km). The Alfa DNA system lever will always return to the center position after use. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and Anti-Slip ReguThe selected driving mode is indicated by the corre- lation (ASR) systems: sponding LED switching in the panel and by an indica- The ESC and ASR system ensures more enjoyable, tion on the display. sportier driving while guaranteeing the stability of the vehicle. Dynamic Mode Activation Electronic Q2 system: Move the Alfa DNA system lever upwards (to the letter The system increases vehicle stability while accelerating “D”) and hold in this position for half a second, until the on bends, improving the agility of the vehicle. corresponding LED lights up and the Dynamic mode Engine And Gearbox/Transmission: activation indicator appears on the display. The system adjusts the transmission shift calibration for When Dynamic mode is activated, the turbocharger sportier shifting. pressure and engine oil temperature screen is displayed automatically. When released, the Alfa DNA system lever NOTE: In Dynamic mode, the engine response to the accelerator pedal position increases considerably. Consewill return to the central position. quently, driving is less fluid and comfortable. 5 186 STARTING AND OPERATING When Race mode is activated, the longitudinal/lateral accelerometer indicator screen (G-meter information) is To deactivate Dynamic mode and return to Natural, displayed automatically. This considers gravitational acmove lever downwards (to letter “A”) and keep it in this celeration (G). position for half a second. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and Anti-Slip ReguThe LED corresponding to Natural mode will light up lation (ASR) systems: and the Natural mode activation indication will appear These systems are deactivated in order to ensure the on the display. fullest sensation of sport, leaving the driver in full control Race Mode of the vehicle. When the vehicle is in unstable conditions, Activation the ESC reactivates automatically when the brake pedal is pressed until the ABS intervenes, thus returning the Starting in Dynamic mode, move the Alfa DNA system lever upwards (to the letter “D”) and hold in this position vehicle to stable conditions. To deactivate the ESC and ASR systems reactivate Race mode. for five seconds, until the Race mode activation indicator appears on the display. Electronic Q2 system: Deactivation The system increases vehicle stability while accelerating on bends, improving the agility of the vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 187 Engine And Gearbox/Transmission: Natural Mode The system adjusts the transmission shift calibration for Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR) systems: sportier shifting. NOTE: In Race mode, the sensitivity of the accelerator ESC and ASR system thresholds are aimed at providing pedal increases considerably. Consequently, driving is comfort and safety in normal grip and driving conditions. less fluid and comfortable. In Race mode the transmission only works in MANUAL Electronic Q2 system: mode. Refer to the ⬙Manual Operation⬙ in ⬙Starting and The system is calibrated to ensure the best driving Operating⬙ for further information. comfort. Deactivation Engine And Gearbox/Transmission: To deactivate Race mode and return to Dynamic mode, Standard response shifting. move the Alfa DNA system lever downwards (to letter All Weather Mode “A”) and keep it in this position for half a second. The LED corresponding to Dynamic mode will light up Activation and the Dynamic mode activation indication will appear Move the Alfa DNA system lever downwards (to the on the display. letter “A”) and hold in this position for half a second, 5 188 STARTING AND OPERATING until the corresponding LED lights up and the All Deactivation Weather mode activation indicator appears on the disTo deactivate All Weather mode and return to Natural play. mode, move the Alfa DNA system lever upwards (to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and Anti-Slip Regu- letter “D”) and keep it in this position for half a second. lation (ASR) systems: NOTE: ESC and ASR system thresholds are aimed at ensuring • When the engine is next started, All weather mode or maximum safety in low-grip driving conditions. It is Natural mode will be retained when the vehicle is advisable to select All Weather mode in the presence of restarted. low-grip road surfaces. • When the engine is next started, Race mode or DyElectronic Q2 System: namic mode previously selected is not retained. The The system is deactivated. system will reactivate in Natural mode. Engine And Gearbox/Transmission: Standard response shifting. • It is not possible to go directly from Dynamic mode to All Weather mode and vice versa. You must always first go back to Natural mode and then select the other mode. STARTING AND OPERATING 189 System Failure 3. Press the ⬙–⬙ paddle behind the steering wheel. (This allows the engine to rev above the 3000 RPM limit.) In the event of system failure or a fault with the gear When the brake pedal is released, the vehicle will start selector, no driving modes can be selected. with maximum acceleration. Despite the MANUAL The display will become grey (same screen as ⬙Natural⬙ mode, the vehicle will automatically shift the gear to mode) but without an indication of the Alfa DNA setting. guarantee maximum acceleration, once the correct shiftThe display will also show a warning message. ing speed has been reached. Please contact your authorized dealer for service. Launch Control The Launch Control strategy permits high-performance acceleration from stand still. This strategy can be activated with vehicle at a standstill, Race mode selected and FIRST (1st) gear engaged. The sequence of operations to perform is as follows: 1. Press the brake pedal and hold it down. WARNING! Launch Control is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be used on any public roadways. Use Launch Control only in a controlled and dry track environment; within the limits of the law. Actual Launch Control performance may change depending on the surface and current traction conditions. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a 2. Press the accelerator pedal and hold it down. (Continued) 5 190 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.). To discontinue the strategy, simply interrupt the above sequence of operations or release the accelerator pedal. DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road Acceleration surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip- partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precauerratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs tions should be observed: when there is a difference in the surface traction under • Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are the rear (driving) wheels. slushy. STARTING AND OPERATING 191 • Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water • Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. • Keep tires properly inflated. • Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling. DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING! Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through Driving through water more than a few inches/ shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure and Warnings before doing so. safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. 5 192 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such (Continued) (Continued) CAUTION! STARTING AND OPERATING 193 CAUTION! (Continued) damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 5 PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave manual transmission in REVERSE (R) or FIRST (1st) gear. Parking Brake Lever When the parking brake is applied with the ignition The parking brake lever is located in the central tunnel. switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake To apply the parking brake, pull the parking brake lever Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake lever up slightly, push the center button, then lower the parking brake lever completely. 194 STARTING AND OPERATING When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. A child could (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmission in REVERSE or FIRST gear. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. CAUTION! If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. STARTING AND OPERATING 195 BRAKE SYSTEM ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL) Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake SYSTEM systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses The ESC system improves the directional control and normal capability, the remaining system will still func- stability of the vehicle in various driving conditions. tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking The ESC system corrects the vehicle understeer and effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel oversteer, distributing the brake force on the appropriate during application, greater pedal force required to slow wheels. The torque supplied by the engine can also be or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System reduced in order to maintain control of the vehicle. Warning Light”. In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., repeated brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating. WARNING! • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or (Continued) 5 196 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent collisions.The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. • Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any (Continued) vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. The ESC system uses sensors installed on the vehicle to determine the trajectory that the driver intends to follow and compares it with the vehicles effective trajectory. When the real trajectory deviates from the desired trajectory, the ESC system intervenes to counter the vehicles understeer or oversteer. • Oversteer: occurs when the vehicle is turning more than it should according to the angle of the steering wheel. • Understeer: occurs when the vehicle is turning less than it should according to the angle of the steering wheel. STARTING AND OPERATING 197 This vehicle’s advanced electronic brake control system also includes: Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD), AntiLock Brake System (ABS), Cornering Brake Control System (CBC), Drag Torque Control System (DTC), AntiSlip Regulation System (ASR), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Hydraulic Brake Assistant System (HBA), ELECTRONIC Q2 system (E-Q2) and Ready Alert Brake (RAB). All of the systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions, and are commonly referred to as ESC. System Intervention This is indicated by the flashing of the warning light on the instrument panel, to inform the driver that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions. Electronic Brake Distribution System (EBD) The EBD system is an integral part of the ESC system and intervenes during braking, distributing the brake force optimally between front and rear wheels. This guarantees greater braking stability for the vehicle, preventing sudden locking of the rear wheels and the The ESC system activates automatically when the engine consequent instability of the vehicle. is started and can only be deactivated by selecting ⬙Race⬙ mode. Refer to the ⬙Six-Speed Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission⬙ in this section for further information. System Activation 5 198 STARTING AND OPERATING Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces. The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation, which is normal. The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary. WARNING! • When the ABS intervenes and you feel the brake pedal pulsating, do not reduce the pressure, but hold it down firmly and confidently; in doing so you will brake in the shortest distance possible, depending on the current road conditions. • For maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 311 miles (500 km) is required: during this period it is advisable to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking. • If the ABS intervenes, this indicates that the grip of the tires on the road is nearing its limit: you must slow down to a speed compatible with the available grip. • The ABS can’t overrule the natural laws of physics, and can’t increase the grip available according to the condition of the road. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 199 WARNING! (Continued) • The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those due to excessive speed on corners, driving on low-grip surfaces or aquaplaning. • The capability of the ABS must never be tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in such a way as to compromise personal safety and the safety of others. • For the correct operation of the ABS, the tires must of necessity be the same make and type on all wheels, in perfect condition and, above all, of the prescribed type and dimensions. Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning properly. System Intervention A slight pulsing of the brake pedal and noise indicates the intervention of the ABS: this is completely normal when the system intervenes. Cornering Brake Control System (CBC) The system acts when braking on corners, optimizing the distribution of brake pressure on the four wheels: the system prevents the wheels on the inside of the corner When you are in a severe braking condition involving the (less affected by the weight of the vehicle) from locking, use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as ensuring better stability and direction for the vehicle. the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the Drag Torque Control System (DTC) system reverting to the base brake system. This is an integral part of the ESC system and intervenes in the event of sudden downshifting, or during braking 5 200 STARTING AND OPERATING when the ABS intervenes, restoring torque to the engine and thus preventing excessive drag at the drive wheels, which may lead the wheels to lock and a loss of vehicle stability, above all in low-grip conditions. AntiSlip Regulation System (ASR) WARNING! • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent collisions.The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. • Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. STARTING AND OPERATING 201 This is an integral part of the ESC system and automatically operates in the event of one or both drive wheels slipping, loss of grip on wet roads (hydroplaning) and acceleration on slippery, snowy or icy roads, etc. Hill Start Assist (HSA) This is an integral part of the ESC system and facilitates starting on slopes, activating automatically in the following cases: Depending on the slipping conditions, two different • Uphill: vehicle stationary on a road with a gradient control systems are activated: higher than 5%, engine running, brake pressed and transmission in neutral (N) or gear other than reverse • If the slipping involves both drive wheels, the ASR engaged. system intervenes, reducing the power transmitted by the engine. • Downhill: vehicle stationary on a road with a gradient higher than 5%, engine running, brake pressed and • If the slipping only involves one of the drive wheels, it reverse (R) gear engaged. also intervenes automatically, braking the wheel that is slipping. When setting off, the ESC system control unit maintains the braking pressure on the wheels until the engine torque necessary for starting is reached, or in any case for This is indicated by the flashing of the warning light on a maximum of two seconds, allowing your right foot to the instrument panel, to inform the driver that the vehicle be moved easily from the brake pedal to the accelerator. is in critical stability and grip conditions. System Intervention 5 202 STARTING AND OPERATING When the two seconds have elapsed, without starting, Hydraulic Brake Assistant System (HBA) the system is automatically deactivated, gradually releasing the braking pressure. During this release stage, the WARNING! typical brake disengagement noise, indicating that the • The HBA system can’t overrule the natural laws of vehicle is going to move imminently, can be heard. physics, and can’t increase the grip available acNOTE: cording to the condition of the road. • The HBA system cannot prevent accidents, includ• HSA is not a parking brake; therefore, never leave the ing those due to excessive speed on corners, drivvehicle without having engaged the parking brake, ing on low-grip surfaces or aquaplaning. turned the engine off and engaged first gear, so that • The capability of the HBA system must never be the vehicle is parked in safe conditions. tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in such a • There may be situations on small gradients (less than way as to compromise the safety of the driver, the 8%), with vehicle laden, in which the Hill Holder other occupants of the vehicle or any other road system may not activate, causing a slight reversing user. motion and increasing the risk of collision with another vehicle or object. The driver is, in any case, The HBA system is designed to improve the vehicles braking capacity during emergency braking. The system responsible for safe driving. detects emergency braking by monitoring the speed and STARTING AND OPERATING 203 force with which the brake pedal is pressed, and consequently applies the optimal brake pressure. This can reduce the braking distance, the HBA system therefore completes the ABS. Maximum assistance from the HBA system is obtained pressing the brake pedal very quickly. In addition, the brake pedal should be pressed continuously during braking, avoiding intermittent presses, to get the most out of the system. Electronic Q2 System (E-Q2) The ⬙Electronic Q2⬙ system intervenes during acceleration on corners, braking the inner drive wheel and thus increasing the traction of the outer wheel (which bears more of the vehicles weight): the torque is thus distributed optimally between the drive wheels in accordance with the driving conditions and road surface, permitting particularly effective, sporty driving. Ready Alert Brake System (RAB) Do not reduce pressure on the brake pedal until braking This function activates automatically if the accelerator is no longer necessary. pedal is released rapidly, reducing the brake pad travel The HBA system is deactivated when the brake pedal is (both at front and back), with the aim of preparing the released. braking system and enhancing its responsiveness, thus reducing the stopping distance in the event of subsequent braking. 5 204 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings NOTE: • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. • European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description 4 — Maximum Load 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades • LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. STARTING AND OPERATING 205 • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or T or S = Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) – Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) 5 206 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE: R = Construction code – ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or – ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index – A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol – A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions – The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) STARTING AND OPERATING 207 EXAMPLE: Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: • XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or • LL = Light load tire or • C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Tire Identification Number (TIN) 5 208 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation – This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 01 means the year 2001 – Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 STARTING AND OPERATING 209 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. 5 210 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Example Tire Placard Location (Door) STARTING AND OPERATING 211 Tire And Loading Information Placard 5 Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. 212 STARTING AND OPERATING To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or spare tires. XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and Loading trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the weight referenced here. the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard. And Operating” section of this manual. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of tion of this manual. cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 213 “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will NOTE: be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followis 650 lbs (294 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs ing table shows examples on how to calculate total (340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) = load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your 650 lbs [294 kg]). vehicle with varying seating configurations and num5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load and load carry capacity of your vehicle. capacity calculated in step 4. • For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). 5 214 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING AND OPERATING 215 WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: • Safety and Vehicle Stability • Economy • Tread Wear • Ride Comfort Safety WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure. • Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. (Continued) 5 216 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. response or over responsiveness in the steering. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable NOTE: ride. • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause Tire Inflation Pressures erratic and unpredictable steering response. The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side vehicle to drift left or right. door. Fuel Economy At least once a month: Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality resulting in higher fuel consumption. pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual STARTING AND OPERATING 217 judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the may look properly inflated even when they are under- maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sideinflated. wall. • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. CAUTION! Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter. Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. 5 218 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and WARNING! within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires. equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatTire Repair ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. WARNING! High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria: • The tire has not been driven on when flat. • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). • The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). STARTING AND OPERATING 219 Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped additional information. Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if Tire Types roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informaAll Season Tires — If Equipped tion, contact an authorized dealer. All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. 5 220 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. Snow Tires While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall. hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be If you need snow tires, select tires checked before using these tire types. equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a STARTING AND OPERATING 221 Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode. CAUTION! Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If Equipped Spare Tires — If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit wheel equivalent in look and function to the original instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern. 5 222 STARTING AND OPERATING Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 80D18 103M. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time. WARNING! Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Full Size Spare — If Equipped Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size STARTING AND OPERATING 223 spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. Limited Use Spare — If Equipped WARNING! Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the Tire Spinning first opportunity. When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping. 5 224 STARTING AND OPERATING Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Tire Tread Tread Wear Indicators 1 — Worn Tire Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires 2 — New Tire to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is STARTING AND OPERATING 225 worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information. Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to: • Driving style. tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended. WARNING! Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. • Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacewith oil, grease, and gasoline. ment. Replacement Tires • Distance driven. The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced 5 226 STARTING AND OPERATING wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. WARNING! • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 227 WARNING! (Continued) • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage. • Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer. • Install on Rear Tires Only. • Reduced size snow chains with a maximum projection of 7 mm beyond the tire profile can be fitted on vehicles equipped with 235/40 R18 rear tire. 5 228 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: • Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use. • Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. • Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. (Continued) • Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). • Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Due to tire design and size, tire rotations on this vehicle are not possible. NOTE: For AR 4C models, where available, the vehicle may be equipped with high performance tires that guarantee high grip performance with little increase of wear. Alfa Romeo, in collaboration with Pirelli, developed a specific high performance tire for the 4C model. A dedicated Pirelli PZero, identified with an AR mark, STARTING AND OPERATING 229 guarantees this vehicle to obtain the highest performance also increase as the vehicle is driven, this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased prescapable. sure. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or mended cold tire pressure. natural pressure loss through the tire. The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitorthe tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will 5 230 STARTING AND OPERATING driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value. CAUTION! • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 231 CAUTION! (Continued) stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care the tire. and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire Base System failure or condition. NOTE: • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the instrument cluster. The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module. 5 232 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the uptire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly dated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph and to maintain the proper pressure. (24 km/h) to receive this information. The TPMS consists of the following components: Check TPMS Warnings • Receiver Module. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors. and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected, the “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. UNAVAILABLE” text message will display. If the igniTire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings tion key is cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi- system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring nate in the instrument cluster, an acoustic signal will be Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no activated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire” longer exists. A system fault can occur with any of the text message will display when one or more of the four following scenarios: active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire TPM sensors. to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update and the Tire STARTING AND OPERATING 233 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting 3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minthat affects radio wave signals. utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. seconds and then remain on solid. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 4. This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle, a 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact then remain on solid. spare wheel and tire assembly. 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire. Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light receive this information. will still turn ON due to the low tire. 5 234 STARTING AND OPERATING General Information FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1750 Turbo This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: The 1750 turbo engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance (1) This device may not cause harmful interference. when using high-quality premium un(2) This device must accept any interference received, leaded gasoline with an octane rating of including interference that may cause undesired opera- Only 91 or higher. tion. Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at by the party responsible for compliance could void the high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is user’s authority to operate the equipment. required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the appropriate octane rating for your engine) before considering service for the vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 235 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components. Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends CAUTION! DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol (E-10). Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10% ethanol (E-10). Problems that result from using gasoline containing more Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- than 10% ethanol (E-10) or gasoline containing methanol genates such as ethanol. are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 5 236 STARTING AND OPERATING • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline. • Poor engine performance. Materials Added To Fuel • Poor cold start and cold drivability. Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol (E-10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: • Operate in a lean mode. • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion. MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is STARTING AND OPERATING 237 economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor- Fuel System Cautions mance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in CAUTION! minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom- Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s mended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER performance: • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal Detergent Gasoline Retailers. law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perforIndiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should mance and damage the emissions control system. be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition and varnish removal may contain active solvents or malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or and diaphragm materials. some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance. • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations (Continued) 5 238 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: (Continued) • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. STARTING AND OPERATING 239 ADDING FUEL/SMART FUEL NOTE: • The ⬙Smart Fuel⬙ is a device placed on the top of the filler pipe, it opens and closes automatically when the fuel nozzle is inserted or extracted. • Only the correct nozzle size diameter allows the flap door to open when the nozzle is inserted. 5 Refueling Procedure 1. Open the fuel filler door pulling towards outside. Fuel Filler Door Location 2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flap door inside the pipe seals the system. 240 STARTING AND OPERATING 4. At the end of refueling, before removing the nozzle, wait at least 10 seconds to allow the fuel to flow within the tank. 5. Remove the fuel nozzle from the filler pipe and then close the fuel door. Emergency Gas Can Refueling: Most gas cans will not open the flapper door. A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow emergency refueling with a gas can. Fuel Nozzle Location 1. Retrieve the appropriate funnel from the storage area in the luggage compartment. 3. Insert the fuel nozzle into the filler pipe (the nozzle opens and holds the flap door while refueling) and 2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel start refueling – when the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts nozzle. off, the fuel tank is full. STARTING AND OPERATING 241 CAUTION! To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. WARNING! Emergency Fuel Fill Location 3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door open. 4. Pour fuel into funnel opening. 5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to putting back in the storage area. • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on. • A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling. 5 242 STARTING AND OPERATING TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended. RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground. CAUTION! • DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. • Do not dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a towing dolly can cause significant damage to your vehicle. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. STARTING AND OPERATING 243 Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Flat Tow Dolly Tow None Front Rear All On Trailer Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED OK 5 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS 䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER . . . . . . . . . . .246 䡵 FRONT TOW EYE USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .246 䡵 FIRE EXTINGUISHER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .261 䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE 䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 (EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 ▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . .262 䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 6 246 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHER IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the center console. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down. tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. turn off the Hazard Warning flasher. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down This is an emergency warning system and it should not an impending overheat condition: be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and other motorists. turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. to high. This allows the heater core to act as a NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 247 supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F (116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the coolant temperature drops back into the normal range 200–230°F (93–110°C). The digital warning light may switch on (together with a message on the display) to indicate that the coolant temperature is too high; in this case, stop the engine and call for service. WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench. 6 248 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. Torque Specifications Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Bolt Size 72 Ft-Lbs (98 N·m) M12 x 1.25 Lug Nut/ Bolt Socket Size 17 mm **Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening. Wheel Mounting Surface WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 249 Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. TIRE SERVICE KIT If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit located in the rear storage area under the decklid. Torque Patterns After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel. 6 250 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Tire punctures of up to 1/4” (6 mm) can be repaired; the kit can be used in all weather conditions. Do not remove the foreign object from the punctured tire, i.e., screw or nail. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw the clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve. WARNING! Tire Service Kit Components 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — Power Plug (located on bottom side of Tire Service Kit) Sealant Hose (Clear) Power Button Pressure Gauge Sealant Bottle • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. • Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances: – If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 251 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) – If the tire has any sidewall damage. – If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. – If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. – If the wheel has any damage. – If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. • Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source. • A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. • Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing. • Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. (Continued) Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet socket. Start the vehicle engine. 6 252 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I” position. The electric compressor will be turned on, sealant and air will inflate the tire. Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be reached within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not been reached turn off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the vehicle 30 feet (10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute the sealant inside the tire. Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the compressor directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation process. When the correct pressure has been reached, start driving the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant inside the tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the tire pressure. If the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the nearest Authorized Dealer. WARNING! Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 65 mph (110 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible at an Authorized Dealer. If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above repeat the inflation process to reach the correct tire pressure and continue driving. Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it on the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that the tire has been treated with Tire Service Kit. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 253 WARNING! The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. NOTE: Replace the sealant canister prior to the expiration date at your Authorized Dealer. 6 Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location WARNING! Store the sealant canister in its special compartment, away from sources of heat. Failure to follow this WARNING may result in sealant canister rupture and serious injury or death. 254 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES JUMP-STARTING WARNING! If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly Preparations For Jump-Start so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack the engine compartment. To access the battery remove follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and the protective cover. precautions. CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 255 WARNING! (Continued) • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables do not touch while still connected to the other vehicle. 1. Firmly apply the parking brake, and turn the ignition OFF. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. Battery Location WARNING! • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. (Continued) 3. To remove the protective cover off the battery, pull upward on the cover. 6 256 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING! CAUTION! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. Jump-Starting Procedure WARNING! Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. Positive (+) Battery Post WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 257 Connecting The Jumper Cables 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. WARNING! Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 5. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery (exposed metal part of the engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system. 6. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence: 6 258 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the engine (-) ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. CAUTION! Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable FRONT TOW EYE USAGE from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the Your vehicle is equipped with a tow eye that can be used discharged battery. to tow a disabled vehicle. If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in- The front tow eye receptacle is located on the lower right side of the front fascia. spected at your authorized dealer. To install the tow eye, thread the tow eye into the receptacle. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 259 NOTE: The front tow eye is found stored inside the Tire Service Kit storage bag. 6 Tow Eye Tow Eye Usage Precautions Front Tow Eye Installed NOTE: When using a tow eye be sure to follow the “Tow Eye • Ensure that the tow eye is properly seated and secure in the mounting receptacle. Usage Precautions” in this section. 260 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES • The tow eye is recommended for use with an approved tow bar and or rope. • Do not use the tow eye to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed truck. • Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck vehicle. WARNING! Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes. • Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death. • Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow straps may break or become disengaged, causing serious injury or death. • Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may cause components to break resulting in serious injury or death. Tow Eye Warning Label CAUTION! • The tow eye must be used exclusively for roadside assistance operations. Only use the tow eye with an appropriate device in accordance with the highway (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 261 CAUTION! (Continued) code (a rigid bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a short distance to the nearest service location. • Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow vehicles off the road or where there are obstacles. • In compliance with the above conditions, towing with a tow eye must take place with two vehicles (one towing, the other towed) aligned as much as possible along the same center line. Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guidelines are not followed. • When towing, only use a facility that can tow vehicles with low ground clearances as extensive damage can result by using a standard tow truck platform. FIRE EXTINGUISHER — IF EQUIPPED The fire extinguisher is located under the dashboard in front of the passenger side seat. 6 Fire Extinguisher 262 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Please refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags” in “Occupant Restraints” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information on the Event This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Data Recorder (EDR). Response System. ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) Please refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags” in “Occupant Restraints” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function. EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1750 TURBO . . . .265 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .266 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 ▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 ▫ Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .270 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 ▫ Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 ▫ Windshield Washer Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 ▫ Adding Washer Solvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 7 264 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 ▫ Rear Light Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 ▫ Direction Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 ▫ Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .297 ▫ Tail Lights/Brake Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 ▫ Reversing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 ▫ Engine Compartment Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 ▫ Dashboard Fuse Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 ▫ Third Brake Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 ▫ License Plate Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 ▫ Roof Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 ▫ Luggage Compartment Roof Light . . . . . . . . .324 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 ▫ Front Light Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 ▫ Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 265 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1750 TURBO 7 1 — Fuse Box 2 — Battery 3 — Engine Oil Dip Stick 4 — Engine Oil Fill 5 — Coolant Reservoir 266 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 267 access this information to assist with the diagnosis and For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Unservice of your vehicle and emissions system. derstanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD. WARNING! • ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to diagnose or service your vehicle. • If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may: • Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. • Access, or allow others to access, information stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information. EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently 7 268 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace- • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which not proceed to the I/M station. you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully following: illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed not crank or start the engine. to the I/M station. NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your start this test over. authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light you may need to do nothing more than drive your (MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine check. may then indicate that the system is now ready. 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen: MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 269 Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running. REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty. DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you. WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. 7 270 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES CAUTION! (Continued) The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle. Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future. CAUTION! • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center. (Continued) • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure. Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 271 regular intervals. The best time to check the engine oil level is before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Do not check oil level when the engine is warm. Checking engine oil level when the engine is warm will give you an incorrect reading. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and has sat overnight, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range. CAUTION! Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased oil temperature could damage your engine. Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers. 7 272 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addiFor best performance and maximum protection for turtives. bocharged engines under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and FCA Material Standard MS-12991. oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Engine Oil Viscosity — 1750 Turbo Engine (SAE indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Grade) environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recommended for station or governmental agency for advice on how and all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Engine Oil Selection Engine Oil Filter Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change. ber should not be used. Materials Added To Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposdition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 273 quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended. Engine Air Cleaner Filter WARNING! (Continued) vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainte- Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters intervals. varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recomWARNING! mended. The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine Engine Cover backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air To avoid possible damage to the engine cover, please cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary disconnect each of the four mounting studs by pulling for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is the engine cover upward, and then lift off the complete near the engine compartment before starting the (Continued) 7 274 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE cover. Tilting the engine cover when one or more studs are still engaged will lead to premature failure of the couplers. To reassemble the cover back onto the engine, first make sure it is properly aligned, the oil cap is centered, and that all four studs are lined up with their couplers. Then gently push on the four corners of the engine cover to snap the stud back into position. No tools are required to remove or reassemble the engine cover. Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 275 WARNING! (Continued) • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). CAUTION! • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. NOTE: • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the USB card, for further warranty information. 7 276 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 277 other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha- Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perforWiper Blades mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and Blade Lifting help reduce streaking and smearing. If it is necessary to lift the blade from the windshield (In Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods the event of snow or blade replacement) Proceed as may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use directed: washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt 1. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the OFF from a dry windshield or rear window. position. 7 278 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2. Turn the ignition to the MAR-ON position then to STOP. second. The windshield wiper then executes part of a stroke; at each command, approximately 1/3 of a normal wiper stroke is triggered. NOTE: The previous operation can be repeated up to three times. In order to move the blades to the most suitable position. 4. Lift the blade from the windshield and proceed with the required operation. 5. Carefully lower the blade, bringing it back in contact with the windshield. 6. Bring the blade to the initial rest position, turning the ignition to MAR-ON. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever NOTE: Do not operate the screen wiper with the blades 3. After turning the ignition to the STOP, within two lifted from the windshield. minutes move the right stalk upward, into the unstable (“anti-panic”) position, for at least half of a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 279 Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the windshield. 2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper blade. 3. Push the wiper blade up the and remove it. 7 1 — Wiper Blade 2 — Release Button 3 — Wiper Arm 4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper blade until it snaps into place. 280 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Windshield Washer Nozzles Adding Washer Solvent The windshield washer nozzles are adjustable. They originally adjusted at the factory. Should it be necessary to adjust them again, contact your authorized Alfa Romeo Dealer. If there is not jet of fluid, first check that there is fluid in the washer reservoir. Refer to “Adding Washer Solvent” in this section for further information. Then check that the nozzle holes are not clogged; use a suitable tool such as a needle to unblock them if necessary. 1 — Brake Fluid Access Panel 2 — Washer Solvent Access Panel MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 281 To check the windshield washer solvent level, proceed as follows: 1. To avoid any interference during the procedure, lift the windshield wiper blade. 2. Loosen the four screws using the supplied screwdriver. Remove the washer solvent protection panel. 7 1 — Screw Locations 3. Release the plug from the opening. 282 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4. Leaving the plug close to the opening, put a finger on the central hole in the plug and remove it: the level can be seen on the control pipe due to capillarity. Washer Solvent Dip Stick 5. After the check, reinsert the plug with the control pipe in the initial position. Washer Solvent Plug 6. Reposition the washer solvent protection panel and tighten the four self-tapping screws. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 283 If the level is not sufficient, namely if there is no washer solvent inside the pipe, proceed as follows: 1. To avoid any interference during the procedure, lift the windshield wiper blade. 2. Loosen the four screws using the supplied screwdriver. Remove the washer solvent protection panel. 3. Take the black funnel for topping up the windshield washer solvent and its extension pipe from the service kit in the luggage compartment. 4. Take out the plug with the solvent control pipe through the washer solvent protection panel. 7 Washer Solvent Fill Funnel 6. After topping up, remove the funnel with the exten5. Introduce the funnel and its extension pipe in the sion pipe. reservoir neck and top up. 7. Refit the plug with the dipstick. 8. Reposition the washer solvent protection panel and tighten the four self-tapping screws. 284 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. WARNING! • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 285 CAUTION! • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately. 7 286 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System age: • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. WARNING! • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position. • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. Coolant Checks Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 287 applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer. If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032). Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Selection Of Coolant Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. CAUTION! • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine (Continued) 7 288 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): • We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 289 • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentraneeded to be added to the system, please contact your tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F local authorized dealer. (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer for assistance. • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. possible. NOTE: Cooling System Pressure Cap • It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated. The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank. 7 290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any with your local authorities to determine the disposal accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in WARNING! puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek • Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is spills immediately. overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to Coolant Level build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the method for determining that the coolant level is adsystem is hot or under pressure. equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be bespecified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en- tween the “MIN” and “MAX” marks. gine damage may result. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant month. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291 When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antimaintain the proper level, it should be added to the freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant coolant bottle. Do not overfill. expansion bottle must also be protected against freezPoints To Remember ing. NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming required, the cooling system should be pressure tested from the front of the engine compartment. This is norfor leaks. mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. protection of your engine which contains aluminum If an examination of your engine compartment shows no components. evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. condenser clean. • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install 7 292 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. Brake System In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. WARNING! Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also reduce braking capacity in an emergency. Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services, or immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is on. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. • Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. (Continued) 7 294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Checking Brake Fluid Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission. 1 — Brake Fluid Protection Panel 2 — Washer Solvent Protection Panel MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295 To check the brake fluid level, proceed as follows: 2. Check that the fluid is at the max. level. 1. Loosen the two screws and remove the brake fluid 3. After checking, reposition the brake fluid protection protection panel. panel and tighten the two screws. 7 Brake Fluid Protection Panel 1 — Screw Locations 296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Adding Brake Fluid If the fluid level in the reservoir is not sufficient, proceed as follows: 1. Take the black funnel for topping up the brake fluid and its extension pipe from the service kit in the luggage compartment. 2. Loosen the reservoir plug and introduce the funnel with the extension pipe in the reservoir inlet. Brake Fluid Funnel 3. After topping up, remove the funnel with the extension pipe. 4. Tighten the reservoir plug. 5. Reposition the brake fluid protection panel and tighten the two screws. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297 NOTE: Be very careful while removing the plug from the opening to prevent the plug from falling inside the vehicle body. Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used. CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. Transmission fluid is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. 7 298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. Fluid Level Check Fluid Changes The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. However, change the fluid if it becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason. Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299 trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. • Insects, tree sap and tar. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Washing • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild The following maintenance recommendations will enable car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion clear water. resistance built into your vehicle. • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumuWhat Causes Corrosion? lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove. Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. The most common causes are: • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. • Stone and gravel impact. • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. 7 300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. CAUTION! (Continued) • Do not run this vehicle through an Automatic Car Wash facility as extensive damage can result due to the vehicle’s low ground clearance. NOTE: Hand washing is recommended, Avoid washing with power washers and do not use commercial car wash facilities. Special Care CAUTION! • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. • If the engine compartment is washed with an high pressure jet, keep it at a distance of at least 8 inches (20 centimeters) from filler surface. (Continued) • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301 have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permathe owner. nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used packaged and sealed. on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider this finish. mud or stone shields behind each wheel. • Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. Wheel And Wheel Trim Care • All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner. CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. 7 302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If Equipped Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting. ner: Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for with a clean, dry towel. leather upholstery. • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular • For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth • For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather protectants on Stain Repel products. upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303 WARNING! CAUTION! Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result. CAUTION! Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately. CAUTION! Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. 7 304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Glass Surfaces protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface. All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution Instrument Panel Bezels when cleaning the inside rear window equipped. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch CAUTION! the elements. When installing hanging air fresheners in your veLabels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water hicle, read the installation instructions carefully. (if equipped), keep all objects a safe distance from the Some air fresheners will damage the finish of windows. painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the contact any surface. towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses directly on the mirror. The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are Instrument Panel Cover molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. 2. Dry with a soft cloth. Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly. WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). 7 306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FUSES WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. (Continued) • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307 Engine Compartment Fuses The engine compartment fuse box is located on the left side of the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the fuses, remove screws and then remove the cover. 7 Engine Compartment Fuse Box 1 — Forward Screw 2 — Fuse Box Cover 3 — Rearward Screw The ID number of the electrical component corresponding to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover. 308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity F01 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 Maxi Fuse 70 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow 40 Amp Orange 20 Amp Yellow 40 Amp Orange 50 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow – – – – – – – – Mini Fuse – – – – – – – 5 Amp Tan 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 5 Amp Tan 10 Amp Red 5 Amp Tan Description Body Controller Ignition Switch Anti-Lock Brake Pump Anti-Lock Brake Valve Radiator Fan - Low Speed Radiator Fan - High Speed Blower Motor Headlight beam switch (If Equipped) Horn Powertrain Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission, ECM Powertrain Powertrain MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309 Cavity F19 F21 F22 F24 F30 F82 F83 F84 F86 F88 Maxi Fuse – – – – – 30 Amp Green 40 Amp Orange – – – Mini Fuse 7.5 Amp Brown 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 5 Amp Tan 10 Amp Red – – 5 Amp Tan 15 Amp Blue 7.5 Amp Brown Description Air Conditioning Compressor Fuel Pump Engine Control Unit Power Supply Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Water Pump, HVAC Headlamp Washer (If Equipped) Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission Pump After Run Pump Rear Power Outlet 12V Heated Mirrors 7 310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE under the forward passenger floor. Remove the six The dashboard fuse box is part of the Body Control screws and the forward floor pan to access the BCM. Module (BCM) and is located on the passenger side Dashboard Fuse Box Mini Fuse Description 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 Vehicle Fuse Number F53 F38 F36 F43 F48 F50 F51 7.5 Amp Brown 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 7.5 Amp Brown 7.5 Amp Brown 11 12 F37 F49 7.5 Amp Brown 5 Amp Tan Instrument Panel Node Central Door Locking Diagnostic Socket, Vehicle Radio, TPMS, Alarm Bi-Directional Washer Passenger Power Window Airbag Headlamp Washer Relay, A/C Compressor Relay, High Beam Relay, Parking ECU, Vehicle Radio, Stop Lamp Switch Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node Transmission Shifter Module, Cigar Lighter Light, Cavity MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311 Cavity Vehicle Fuse Number Mini Fuse 13 14 F31 F47 5 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow VEHICLE STORAGE Description Drive Style Unit, Heated Mirrors Relay Climate Control, Body Controller Driver Power Window REPLACEMENT BULBS If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your Interior Bulbs battery. Overhead Lamp • Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of Luggage Compartment service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. Bulb Number C10W W5W 7 312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Exterior Bulbs Parking Lights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Rear Tail Lights Font and Rear Side Lights Dipped/Main Beam Headlights (Versions With Bi-Halogen Headlights) — If Equipped Dipped/Main Beam Headlights (Versions With Bi-Xenon Headlights) — If Equipped Dipped/Main Beam Headlights (Versions With Bi-Led Headlights) — If Equipped Front Direction Indicators Bulb Number LED (See Authorized Dealer) LED (See Authorized Dealer) W3W HIR2 D5S (See Authorized Dealer) LED (See Authorized Dealer) PY24W Rear Direction Indicators Side Direction Indicators Brake Lights Third Brake Light License Plate Lamps Reversing light Bulb Number P21W WY5W LED (See Authorized Dealer) LED (See Authorized Dealer) W5W W16W NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313 BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process. Front Light Clusters The front head lamp contains bulbs for the parking lights/daytime running lights (DRL), low beam headlights, high beam headlights and direction indicators. 7 1 — Daytime Running Lights 2 — Direction Indicator 3 — High/Low Beam Lights If bulb replacement is required, please see an authorized dealer. 314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Side Lights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) These are LEDs. For the replacement, contact the your authorized dealer. Low/High Beam Bi-Halogen Headlights To change the bulb, proceed as follows: 1. Turn the steering wheel completely. 2. Open the protective flap by rotating the screw. 1 — Direction Indicator Bulb Protective Flap 2 — Headlamp Bulb Protective Flap 3. Remove protective cover from headlamp assembly. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315 7 Protective Cover 4. Remove the electric connector (1) and then rotate the 1 — Electrical Connector 2 — Bulb Holder bulb holder (2) clockwise and remove it. 5. Extract the bulb and replace it. 6. Refit the new bulb, making sure that it is locked correctly, and reconnect the electrical connector. 316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 7. Reinstall protective cover in the headlamp assembly and close the protective flap. Low/High Beam HID & LED Headlights For the replacement, contact the your authorized dealer. Direction Indicators Front: 1. Turn the steering wheel completely. 2. Open the protective flap by rotating the screw. 1 — Direction Indicator Bulb Protective Flap 2 — Headlamp Bulb Protective Flap 3. Remove protective cover from headlamp assembly. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317 6. Install the new bulb, making sure that it is locked in correctly, and reinstall into headlamp assembly. 7. Reinstall protective cover in the headlamp assembly and close the protective flap. Side: 1. Adjust the lens in the point shown in to compress the retaining clip, then pull the cluster outwards. 2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, remove the bulb and replace it. Protective Cover 3. Install the bulb holder in the lens and turn it clockwise. 4. Rotate the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 4. Install the cluster making sure that the internal clip clicks into position. 5. Rotate the bulb assembly counter clockwise to remove from bulb holder. 7 318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 1. Turn the front wheels to gain access and then remove the fastener from the inner wheel liner. 1 — Lens 2 — Bulb Holder Fastener Location Front Side Marker To change the bulb, proceed as follows: 2. Fold back wheel liner door to access bulb housing. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319 7 Bulb Housing Location Front Side Marker Bulb 3. Remove bulb from bulb housing then remove and Rear Light Clusters replace bulb and reinstall. These contain the bulbs for the side lights, direction indicators and brake lights. 320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Direction Indicators To change the bulb, proceed as follows: 2. Remove the second protective cap insert a hand inside the opening. 1. Remove the protective cap (one for each side) on the side cover of the luggage compartment. Second Protective Cap 3. Rotate clockwise to remove the bulb holder remove the bulb from the bulb holder. First Protective Cap MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321 4. Install the bulb by pressing it into bulb holder then turn install the bulb holder and turn it counterclockwise. 5. Install the previously removed protective caps. Tail Lights/Brake Lights These are LEDs. For the replacement, contact the your local dealer. Reversing Light 7 WARNING! The reversing light are located close to the exhaust pipes; take the utmost care not to get burnt during the bulb replacement. To replace the reversing lights turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, remove the bulb and replace it. 1 — Reverse Light Location 2 — Reverse Light Location 322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE License Plate Lights To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: 1. Position the lens in the point shown laterally to compress the retaining clip, then pull the license plate light cluster out. Reversing Light Bulb Holder Third Brake Lights These are LEDs. For the replacement, contact your local dealer. License Plate Lamp Removal MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323 2. Turn bulb holder (1) counterclockwise, remove bulb Roof Light (2) and replace it. To change the bulb, proceed as follows: 1. Remove roof light working at the points indicated by the arrows. 7 1 — Bulb Holder 2 — Bulb Roof Light 324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2. Open protective flap (2) and replace bulb (1), releasing 3. Close protective flap (2) and install roof light in its it from the side contacts. Make sure that the new bulb housing, making sure that it is locked in place. is correctly secured between the contacts. Luggage Compartment Roof Light To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: 1. Open the luggage compartment and remove luggage compartment roof light, working in the direction shown by the arrow. 1 — Bulb 2 — Protective Flap MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325 4. Install luggage compartment roof light by inserting it in its correct position, first on one side and then pressing on the other side until it clicks into place. 7 1 — Light Cover 2 — Light Protector 2. Open light protector (2) and replace the bulb. 3. Close protector on the lens. 326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel (Approximate) 1750 Turbo Engine Reserve Fuel Engine Oil with Filter 1750 Turbo Engine Cooling System 1750 Turbo Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula). U.S. Metric 10.5 Gallons 1.1 Gallons 40 Liters 4 Liters 6.1 Quarts 5.8 Liters 11.2 Quarts 10.6 Liters MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant – 1750 Turbo Engine Engine Oil – 1750 Turbo Engine Engine Oil Filter – 1750 Turbo Engine Spark Plugs – 1750 Turbo Engine Fuel Selection – 1750 Turbo Engine Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12991. We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter. We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs. * Use Only 91 Octane or higher, 0-10% Ethanol. NOTE: * The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine: only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are specially certified for such engines strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the maintenance schedule. For spark plug replacement, it is advisable to contact the dedicated Alfa Romeo Dealership. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” section for the required spark plug intervals. 7 328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Chassis Component Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission Brake Master Cylinder Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part • Gearbox: Full synthetic 75W-85 manual transmission fluid meeting MS.90030-M2 and the API GL4 specification. • Control System: Use only MOPAR C Series DDCT SAE 75W Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 4 meeting MS.90039. If DOT 4 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 3 is acceptable. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS 䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 ▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 8 330 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES The Wrench Warning Light may appear in the cluster as a service reminder when vehicle maintenance is required, Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change according to the scheduled maintenance mileage. The indicator system. The oil change indicator system will maintenance schedule intervals are set by the manufacremind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for turer. Failure to have them carried out may void your scheduled maintenance. New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interindicator message will illuminate in the instrument clusvals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or ter. This means that an engine oil and engine oil filter 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The change is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or concern for fleet customers. cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- Severe Duty All Models quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating CondiIn addition, if your vehicle is used under demanding tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as conditions, including: early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 • On the track miles (805 km). • On dusty roads MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 331 • Short, repeated trips (less than 4-5 miles or 7-8 km) at • Visually inspect condition of: engine, gearbox, transsub-zero temperatures mission, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system brakes) and rubber elements (gaiters - sleeves - bushes • Allowing the engine to idle for extended periods of - etc.) time • Check battery charge and battery fluid level (electro• Driving for long distances at low speeds lyte) • Allowing the vehicle to sit for long periods of inactiv• Visually inspect condition of the auxiliary drive belts ity • Check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace Under any of the above circumstances, the following oil filter checks need to be performed more frequently than indicated in the Maintenance Schedule: • Check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner • Check front and rear disc brake pad condition and Using the vehicle on a track should be regarded as an wear exception. The vehicle has been designed and manufactured for road use. • Check cleanliness of tailgate locks. Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle • Check cleanliness and lubrication of chassis and steeris operated in a dusty and off road environment. This ing linkage type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. 8 332 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES If the vehicle is operated in a dusty or dirty environment • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual the engine air filter has to be changed every 6,500 miles wear or damage (10,000 km). • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip/Periodic Checks brake master cylinder reservoir, and add as needed Every 600 miles (1,000 km) or before long trips, check • Check function of all interior and exterior lights and, if necessary, top off the following: • Check screen wash/wipe system and positioning/ • Check engine oil level wear of windscreen • Check brake fluid level • Check windshield washer fluid level Every 2,000 miles (3,000 km) check and, if necessary, top up: engine oil level MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 333 Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: Change oil and filter. Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required. Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses. Check and adjust hand brake. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. 8 334 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 156,000 144 156 Check battery charge status and possibly recharge Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure if required Check lighting system operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights, passenger compartment lights, boot lights, instrument panel warning lights, etc.) Check vehicle fasteners 260,000 144,000 132 240,000 132,000 120 220,000 120,000 108 200,000 108,000 96 180,000 96,000 84 160,000 84,000 72 140,000 72,000 60 120,000 60,000 48 100,000 48,000 36 80,000 36,000 24 60,000 24,000 12 40,000 Or Months: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 12,000 Maintenance Chart X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 156,000 144 156 Check mechanical components fasteners Check windscreen wiper/ washer operation, adjust nozzles Check position/wear of windscreen wiper blade Check cleanliness of hood and deck lid locks, as well as cleanliness and lubrication of associated linkages 260,000 144,000 132 240,000 132,000 120 220,000 120,000 108 200,000 108,000 96 180,000 96,000 84 160,000 84,000 72 140,000 72,000 60 120,000 60,000 48 100,000 48,000 36 80,000 36,000 24 60,000 24,000 12 40,000 Or Months: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 12,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 335 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 8 156,000 144 156 Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, carbon monocoque, aerodynamic bottom, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel supply system, brakes), rubber elements (boots, driveshaft boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.) Check condition and wear of front brake pads and discs, and operation of pad wear indicator 260,000 144,000 132 240,000 132,000 120 220,000 120,000 108 200,000 108,000 96 180,000 96,000 84 160,000 84,000 72 140,000 72,000 60 120,000 60,000 48 100,000 48,000 36 80,000 36,000 24 60,000 24,000 12 40,000 Or Months: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 12,000 336 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 156,000 144 156 Check condition and wear of rear brake pads and discs, and operation of pad wear indicator Check and top off, if required, fluid levels (engine coolant, brake/hydraulic clutch fluid, windscreen washer fluid, battery fluid, etc) Visually inspect the condition of accessory drive belt(s) Check condition of timing belt 260,000 144,000 132 240,000 132,000 120 220,000 120,000 108 200,000 108,000 96 180,000 96,000 84 160,000 84,000 72 140,000 72,000 60 120,000 60,000 48 100,000 48,000 36 80,000 36,000 24 60,000 24,000 12 40,000 Or Months: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 12,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 337 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 8 156,000 144 156 Check handbrake lever travel and adjust, if necessary (or every 12 months) Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool) Check and, if necessary, top off oil level of twin clutch transmission Replace accessory drive belt(s) Replace spark plugs (#) Replace toothed timing drive belt (*) 260,000 144,000 132 240,000 132,000 120 220,000 120,000 108 200,000 108,000 96 180,000 96,000 84 160,000 84,000 72 140,000 72,000 60 120,000 60,000 48 100,000 48,000 36 80,000 36,000 24 60,000 24,000 12 40,000 Or Months: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 12,000 338 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 12,000 24,000 36,000 48,000 60,000 72,000 84,000 96,000 108,000 120,000 132,000 144,000 156,000 Or Months: Or Kilometers: 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 20,000 40,000 60,000 80,000 100,000 120,000 140,000 160,000 180,000 200,000 220,000 240,000 260,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 339 Change engine oil and oil filter (**) Change brake fluid (or every 24 months) Replace air filter cartridge (***) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X • Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are specially certified for such engines (refer to “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain(#) The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, ing Your Vehicle” for further information). yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine: Recommend using Midtronics tester to check charge status and, if necessary, recharge battery. 8 340 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES • Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the maintenance schedule for spark plug replacement. • Contact your Alfa Romeo Dealer if you have questions. (*) Regardless of the distance covered, the timing belt must be changed every 4 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, city driving, long periods of idling) or at least every 5 years. (**) The actual interval for changing the oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signalled by the warning light or message (if present) on the instrument panel or every 12 months. (***) If the vehicle is operated in a dusty or dirty environment the engine air filter has to be changed every 6,500 miles (10,000 km). WARNING! • You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS 䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .345 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .342 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. . .345 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .346 䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ▫ Alfa Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 ▫ Alfa Customer Center (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . .343 ▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 ▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 9 342 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE current problem. The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services. specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 343 facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) correctly and in a timely manner. • Vehicle delivery date and mileage This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Alfa Customer Center solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872) general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. Alfa Customer Center (Canada) They want to know if you need assistance. P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- 465-2001 (English) Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French) cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech center. Impaired (TDD/TTY) Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenTo assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the ter should include the following information: manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni• Owner’s name and address cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who 9 344 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French). manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Service Contract Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents. repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited We appreciate that you have made a major investment Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 345 sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related WARRANTY INFORMATION concerns. See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the USB card, for the terms and provisions of ALFA ROMEO WARNING! Automobiles warranties applicable to this vehicle and Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), market. some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy 9 346 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS individual problems between you, your authorized To order the following manuals, you may use either the dealer, and the manufacturer. website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, MasTo contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are acHotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis- for an order form. trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West NOTE: A street address is required when ordering Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. manuals (no P.O. Boxes). You can also obtain other information about motor Service Manuals vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforIn Canada mation that students and professional technicians need in If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainshould contact the Customer Service Department imme- ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans- and/or components is written in straightforward lanport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/ IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 347 Diagnostic Procedure Manuals • Call toll free at: Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) Owner’s Manuals These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Or • Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: www.techauthority.com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. 9 348 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Treadwear concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled WARNING! conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on times as well on the government course as a tire graded straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart peak traction characteristics. significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road charac- Temperature Grades teristics and climate. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat Traction Grades and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 349 passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 9 INDEX 10 352 INDEX Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 262 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 262 Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 69, 125 Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .273 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275, 276 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Alfa DNA System (Dynamic Car Control System) . .184 Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . .176, 266 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298, 328 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287, 326 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 INDEX 353 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .108 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 311 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127, 274 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .20 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195, 292 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . .67 Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311, 313 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .326 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Caps, Filler Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 238 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .267 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 62 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 10 354 INDEX Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326, 327 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286, 290 Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289, 291 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 142 Cupholders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Deck Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Deck Lid, Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .24 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 INDEX 355 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .108 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Electric Remote Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .100 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .124 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Activation Trip Data (Trip B On) . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Autoclose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Average Fuel Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Average Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning Buzzer Volume) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Change Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Change Engine Oil Indicator System . . . . . . . . . .155 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . Distance Traveled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exit Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indications On Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instant Fuel Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . Language (Selecting The Language) . . . . . . New Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service (Scheduled Servicing) . . . . . . . . . . . Set Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Beep (Speed Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start Of Trip Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Adjustment (Clock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Travel Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 . . . .159 . . . .143 Setup . . . .145 . . . .155 . . . .157 . . . .159 . . . .158 . . . .159 . . . .152 . . . .157 . . . .155 . . . .153 . . . .149 . . . .146 . . . .157 . . . .148 . . . .159 10 356 INDEX Trip Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Units (Set Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Values Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Emergency, In Case Of Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .267 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 238 Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270, 326 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Enhanced Accident Response Feature. . . . . . . . .51, 262 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Euro Twin Clutch Transmission Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 238 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 284 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 INDEX 357 Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Flashers Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 139 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .327 Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Materials Added Methanol . . . . . Octane Rating . . Requirements . . Tank Capacity . . Fueling . . . . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 .235 .234 .234 .326 .239 .306 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234, 326 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162, 234 General Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Hazard Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 10 358 INDEX Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Heated Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163, 165 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 12 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 59 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 139 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Key Fob Lock The Doors . . . . . Unlock The Doors . . . Key-In Reminder . . . . . . Key, Replacement . . . . . . Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 .19 .14 .15 .11 .14 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 INDEX 359 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 311 Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 92 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 69, 125 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 142 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .136 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 140 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 139 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .128, 139 Loading Vehicle Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .136, 267 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 10 360 INDEX Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Manual Transmission Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76, 77 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272, 326 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270, 326, 327 INDEX 361 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .5, 346 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Pets, Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .211 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Power Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Pretensioners Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Radio Frequency General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15, 22 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 10 362 INDEX Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 69 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 59, 62 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 34, 37 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .40 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 86 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 INDEX 363 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 139 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221, 222, 223 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Speed Control Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Steering Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .43 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .210, 211 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 215, 221, 347 Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215, 221 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210, 212 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .229 10 364 INDEX Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204, 215 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221, 222, 223 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 To Open Deck Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Towing Eyes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .242 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Transaxle Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .20 Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 INDEX 365 Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .15 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Ventilation System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 345 Washer Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Water Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 10 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems. 16SPDR-126-AB 16SPDR-126-AA ©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission. Second Edition Rev. 1 First Edition Printed in U.S.A.